Toshiba 22lv506 SVM PDF

FILE NO.
810-200875GR
SERVICE MANUAL
22-inch Diagonal LCD TV/DVD

COMBINATION
22LV506
The above model is classified as a green product (*1), as indicated by the underlined serial number.
This Service Manual describes replacement parts for the green product. When repairing this green
product, use the part(s) described in this manual and lead-free solder (*2).
For (*1) and (*2), see the next page.
©2008 Toshiba Corporation

DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, August, 2008 GREEN
(*1) GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT
The EC is actively promoting the WEEE & RoHS Directives that define standards for recycling
and reuse of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment and for the Restriction of the use of
certain Hazardous Substances. From July 1, 2006, the RoHS Directive will prohibit any
marketing of new products containing the restricted substances.
Increasing attention is given to issues related to the global environmental. Toshiba Corporation
recognizes environmental protection as a key management tasks, and is doing its utmost to
enhance and improve the quality and scope of its environmental activities. In line with this,
Toshiba proactively promotes Green Procurement, and seeks to purchase and use products,
parts and materials that have low environmental impacts.
Green procurement of parts is not only confined to manufacture. The same green parts used in
manufacture must also be used as replacement parts.
(*2) LEAD-FREE SOLDER

This product is manufactured using lead-free solder as a part of a movement within the consumer
products industry at large to be environmentally responsible. Lead-free solder must be used in
the servicing and repair of this product.
WARNING
This product is manufactured using lead free solder.
DO NOT USE LEAD BASED SOLDER TO REPAIR THIS PRODUCT !
The melting temperature of lead-free solder is higher than that of leaded solder by 86°F to 104°F
(30°C to 40°C). Use of a soldering iron designed for lead-based solders to repair product made
with lead-free solder may result in damage to the component and or PCB being soldered. Great
care should be made to ensure high-quality soldering when servicing this product  especially
when soldering large components, through-hole pins, and on PCBs  as the level of heat
required to melt lead-free solder is high.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
• GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT
• LEAD-FREE SOLDER
• TABLE OF CONTENTS
• OWNER'S MANUAL
CAUTION ..................................................................................................................................... A1-1

SERVICING NOTICES ON CHECKING .................................................................................... A1-2
HOW TO ORDER PARTS .......................................................................................................... A1-2
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS ..................................................................................................... A1-3~A1-5
WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK ............................................................................................... A1-6
DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY ............................................................ A1-7
PARENTAL CONTROL-RATING LEVEL ................................................................................ A1-7
REMOTE CONTROL KEY CODE .............................................................................................. A1-8
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................... A2-1~A2-7
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1.REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P. C. BOARDS ............................................. B1-1, B1-2
2.REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS ..................................................................................... B2-1, B2-2
3.REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC ................................................ B3-1, B3-2
SERVICE MODE LIST ................................................................................................................. C-1
SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS ....................................................................................... C-2
RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE ............................................................................................ C-2
WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC ......................................................................... C-3
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS .................................................................................................. D-1~D-4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ..................................................................................................... E-1~E-9
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
DVD ........................................................................................................................................... F-1, F-2
POWER ..................................................................................................................................... F-3, F-4
POWER(DIGITAL PCB) .......................................................................................................... F-5, F-6
SIGNAL ..................................................................................................................................... F-7, F-8
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
DVD MT ..................................................................................................................................... G-1, G-2
DIGITAL .................................................................................................................................... G-3~G-6
POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON/SW ................................................................................. G-7, G-8
POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON ......................................................................................... G-9, G-10
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP ................................................................................................. H-1, H-2
MEMORY ................................................................................................................................... H-3, H-4
MOTOR DRIVE ......................................................................................................................... H-5, H-6
AUDIO/VIDEO .......................................................................................................................... H-7, H-8
MICON ....................................................................................................................................... H-9, H-10
SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO .......................................................................................................... H-11, H-12
TUNER ...................................................................................................................................... H-13, H-14
HDMI .......................................................................................................................................... H-15, H-16
LVDS .......................................................................................................................................... H-17, H-18
SCALER POWER ..................................................................................................................... H-19, H-20
FLASH ....................................................................................................................................... H-21, H-22
DDR ........................................................................................................................................... H-23, H-24
JACK .......................................................................................................................................... H-25, H-26
AV SWITCH .............................................................................................................................. H-27, H-28
REGULATOR ........................................................................................................................... H-29, H-30
POWER ..................................................................................................................................... H-31, H-32
BACKLIGHT INVERTER ......................................................................................................... H-33, H-34
SOUND AMP ............................................................................................................................ H-35, H-36
JACK OUT ................................................................................................................................ H-37, H-38
SW ............................................................................................................................................. H-39, H-40
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ................................................................................................ H-41, H-42
WAVEFORMS ............................................................................................................................... I-1, I-2
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW .............................................................................................. J1-1~J1-3
DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW ................................................................................................... J2-1
MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ........................................................................... K1-1
DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST .............................................................................. K2-1
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ............................................................................ K3-1~K3-5
How to Obtain Warranty Services No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company
If, after following all of the operating instructions is authorized to change, modify, or extend
in this manual and checking the section the terms of these warranties in any manner
“Troubleshooting,” you find that service is needed: whatsoever. The time within which an action must
be commenced to enforce any obligation of TACP Introduction 4
(1) For instructions on how to obtain warranty arising under the warranty or under any statute
service for your LCD TV/DVD Combination, or law of the United States or any state thereof is
contact TACP·s Consumer Solution Center toll hereby limited to ninety (90) days from the date
Connections 14
free at 1-800-631-3811. you discover, or should have discovered, the
(2) You must include a copy or original bill of defect. This limitation does not apply to implied
sale or other proof of purchase along with warranties arising under state law.
the entire LCD TV/DVD Combination to the
Depot Warranty Repair Center specified by THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL 19/22-inch* Diagonal LCD TV/DVD Basic setup 21
COMBINATION
the TACP Consumer Solutions Center. You RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER
are responsible for all inbound transportation RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO
and insurance charges for the LCD TV/DVD STATE IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE TV operation 26
Combination to the Depot Warranty Repair
Center specified by the TACP Consumer
Solutions Center.
U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW
LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, WHEN
AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE
19LV505
For additional information, visit TACP·s website:
www.tacp.toshiba.com
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU
19LV506 Basic playback 44
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF

ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING THE
UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.
22LV505 Advanced playback 47
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
22LV506
ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION Function setup 60
OF THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH
ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY
WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY
OWNER’S MANUAL
STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS HEREBY LIMITED, Others 66
THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE
AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS, AND SIMILAR
OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO
THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY
PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL TACP BE LIABLE
FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR
MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED
DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY
TO USE THIS LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION).
Owner·s Record
The model number and serial number
are on the back of your TV/DVD.
ColorStream is registered trademark of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. IIIustration of 19LV505 Record these numbers in the spaces
below. Refer to these numbers
whenever you communicate with your
©2008 Toshiba Corporation Toshiba dealer about this TV/DVD.
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly. Model number:
J50S0101D SH 08/07 N Printed in Thailand *Screen size is approximate. Serial number:
Introduction
Dear Customer, FCC compliance information

Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba LCD TV or TV/DVD
Combination television.
CHILD SAFETY: CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT USE THIS POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD, RECEPTACLE
OR OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES CAN BE FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT BLADE EXPOSURE.
FCC Declaration of Conformity Compliance Statement (Part 15):
It Makes A Difference How and Where You Use Your Flat
This manual will help you use the many exciting features of The Toshiba 19LV505, 19LV506, 22LV505, 22LV506, LCD TV/DVD Combination complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Panel Display
your new LCD TV. Before operating your LCD TV or TV/DVD Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
Combination, please read this manual completely, and keep it must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Congratulations on your purchase! As you enjoy your
nearby for future reference. The party responsible for compliance to these rules is:
Introduction
new product, please keep these safety tips in mind: Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
Safety Precautions The Issue 82 Totowa Rd. Wayne, NJ 07470.
Ph: (800) 631-3811 or visit TACP·s website at www.tacp.Toshiba.com
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR • The home theater entertainment experience is a growing trend
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS and larger flat panel displays are popular purchases. However,
APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
flat panel displays are not always supported on the proper stands
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
or installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
WARNING • Flat panel displays that are
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
R I S K OF E LECTR IC S HOCK inappropriately situated on dressers, television reception, which can be determined by removing and applying power to the equipment, the user is encouraged to
DO NOT OPEN bookcases, shelves, desks, try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
speakers, chests or carts may fall - Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC over and cause injury.
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). - Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
TOSHIBA Cares! - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
• The consumer electronics industry - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
is committed to making home CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Toshiba could void the user·s authority to operate this
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an entertainment enjoyable and safe. equipment.
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to
the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” Tune Into Safety
within the product’s enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric • One size does NOT fit all. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations Location of the required Marking
shock to persons. for the safe installation and use of your flat panel display. CAUTION:
THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM. The rating sheet and the safety caution are the rear of the unit.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle, • Carefully read and understand all enclosed instructions for
is intended to alert the user to the presence of proper use of this product. TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ
important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying the • Don’t allow children to climb on or play with furniture and THIS OWNER'S MANUAL CAREFULLY AND RETAIN FOR
appliance. television sets. FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE
• Don’t place flat panel displays on furniture MAINTENANCE, CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, that can easily be used as steps, such LOCATION.
do not use the polarized plug with an extension as a chest of drawers. USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE
cord, receptacle, or other outlet unless the blades • Remember that children can OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN
can be inserted completely to prevent blade
become excited while watching a MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
exposure. Illustration of
program, especially on a “larger TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, NEVER 19LV505
than life” flat panel display. Care OPEN THE ENCLOSURE. VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE
WARNING: If you decide to wall mount this television, should be taken to place or install
always use a UL Listed wall bracket appropriate for the PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. NEVER STARE
the display where it cannot be INTO BEAM. CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION
size and weight of this television. The use of any wall bracket pushed, pulled over, or knocked down.
other than a UL Listed wall bracket appropriate for the size PERFORMANCE STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.
• Care should be taken to route all cords and
and weight of this television for wall mounting this television
could result in serious bodily injury and/or property damage. cables connected to the flat panel display so that they cannot be
See “Choosing a location for your LCD TV” (Pg.6). pulled or grabbed by curious children.
Wall Mounting: If you decide to wall mount your
ON DISPOSAL
ENERGY STAR® qualified TV. Products that earn The lamp(s) inside this product contain mercury. Disposal may be regulated due to environmental
flat panel display, always:
the ENERGY STAR prevent green house gas
• Use a mount that has been recommended by the display
considerations. For disposal or recycling information, contact your local authorities or the
emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).
guidelines set by the U.S. Environmental manufacturer and/or listed by an independent laboratory (such
Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of as UL, CSA, ETL).
Energy. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR • Follow all instructions supplied by the display and wall mount
mark are registered U.S. marks. manufacturers.
NOTE TO CATV INSTALLERS • If you have any doubts about your ability to safely install your
This is a reminder to call the CATV system installer’s attention flat panel display, contact your retailer about professional
to Article 820-40 of the NEC, which provides guidelines for proper installation.
grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be • Make sure that the wall where you are mounting the display is
connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of appropriate. Some wall mounts are not designed to be mounted
cable entry as practical. For additional antenna grounding information, to walls with steel studs or old cinder block construction. If you
see item 26 on page 5. are unsure, contact a professional
installer.
• A minimum of two people are
required for installation. Flat panel
displays can be heavy.
2 3
Introduction
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS (Continued)

Important Safety Instructions Installation, Care, and Service Installation (cont. from previous page) Care (cont. from previous column)
1) Read these instructions. Installation
2) Keep these instructions. 26) Always make sure the antenna system is properly 32) During normal use, the TV may make occasional
Follow these recommendations and precautions and grounded to provide adequate protection against
3) Heed all warnings. snap ping or popping sounds. This is normal,
heed all warnings when installing your TV: voltage surges and built-up static charges (see
4) Follow all instructions. especially when the unit is being turned on or off.
Introduction
15) To avoid damage to this product, never place or Section 810 of the National Electric Code.) If these sounds become frequent or continuous,
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
store the TV in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas; unplug the power cord and contact a Toshiba
6) Clean only with dry cloth. or areas subject to excessive dust or vibration. Antenna
Authorized Service Center.
lead-in wire
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. 16) Never modify this equipment. Changes or modifications
Install in accordance with the manufacturer·s instructions. Ground clamp 33) Keep your fingers well clear of the disc slot as it is closing.
may void: a) the warranty, and b) the user·s authority to Antenna discharge unit Failure to do so may cause serious personal injury.
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as operate this equipment under the rules of the (NEC Section 810-20)
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus Federal Communications Commission. Electric service
Grounding conductors
34) When you use headphones, keep the volume at a
equipment moderate level. Using headphones continuously
(including amplifiers) that produce heat. 17) DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS (NEC Section 810-21)
PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, OR Ground clamps at a high volume may cause hearing damage.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or Power service grounding
grounding type plug. A polarized plug has two blades EQUIPMENT DAMAGE! Never place 35) NEVER look directly into the disc slot or ventilation
electrode system
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has the TV on an unstable cart, (NEC Art 250 Part H) slots at the source of the laser beam. Doing so
two blades and a third grounding prong. stand, or table. The TV may fall, causing may cause sight damage.
The wide blade or the third prong Wide plug serious personal injury, death, or serious
are provided for your safety. If damage to the TV.
27) DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS 36) NEVER use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc.
the provided plug does not fit into PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH! Such discs are easily broken and may cause serious
your outlet, consult an electrician for 18) Never place items such as vases, aquariums, or • Use extreme care to make sure you personal injury or product damage. SUCH DAMAGE
replacement of the obsolete outlet. candles on top of the TV. are never in a position where your body IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR WARRANTY.
19) WARNING: Always place the TV on the floor or a (or any item you are in contact with,
10) Protect the power cord from being walked 37) WARNING: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL
sturdy, level, stable such as a ladder or screwdriver) can
on or pinched, particularly at plugs, Sturdy tie (as short as possible; min. 4 in.) INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE!
surface that can accidentally touch overhead power lines.
convenience receptacles, and the point Clip • Never strike the screen with a sharp or heavy
support the weight Never locate the antenna near overhead
where they exit from the apparatus. of the unit. To secure object.
Hooks power lines or other electrical circuits.
the TV, use a sturdy • Never touch, press, or place anything on the
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the • Never attempt to install any of the following during
strap from the hooks Screw LCD screen. These actions will damage the LCD
manufacturer. lightning activity: a) an antenna system; or b) cables,
on the rear of the TV screen If you need to clean the LCD screen,
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, wires, or any home theater component connected
pedestal to a wall Band follow the instructions in item 28 on this page.
bracket, or table specified by the TV side TV top to an antenna or phone system.
stud, pillar or other
manufacturer, or sold with the Service
immovable structure. Make sure the strap is tight,
apparatus. When a cart is used, use
secure, and parallel to the floor. Care 38) WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!
caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to avoid 20) Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing For better performance and safer operation of your Never attempt to service the TV
injury from tip-over. liquid or place items such as vases, aquariums, any TOSHIBA TV, follow these recommendations and precautions: yourself.
other item filled with liquid, or candles on top of the TV. Opening and removing the covers
13) Unplug this apparatus during 28) Always unplug the TV before cleaning. may expose you to dangerous voltage or other
lightning storms or when unused 21) Never block or cover the slots or openings in the TV Wipe the display panel hazards. Failure to follow this WARNING may
for long periods of time. cabinet back, bottom, and sides. surface gently using only
result in death or serious injury.
Never place the TV: a soft cloth (supplied.) A
hard cloth may damage the Refer all servicing to a Toshiba Authorized Service
• on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface;
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. surface of the panel. Avoid Center.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged • too close to drapes, curtains,
in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, or walls; or contact with alcohol, 39) If you have the TV serviced:
liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the • in a confined space such as thinner, benzene, acidic or • Ask the service technician to use only replacement
apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or a bookcase, built-in cabinet, and alkaline solvent cleaners, abrasive parts specified by the manufacturer.
moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. or any other place with poor ventilation. cleaners, or chemical cloths, which may damage • Upon completion of service, ask the service
the surface. Never spray volatile compounds such technician to perform routine safety checks to
The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV from
Additional Safety Precautions overheating and to help maintain reliable operation of the TV.
as insecticide on the cabinet. Such products may determine that the TV is in safe operating condition.
14a) CAUTION: If the TV is dropped and the cabinet or damage or discolor the cabinet.
enclosure surface has been damaged or the TV does Leave a space of at least 4 inches around the TV. 40) When the TV reaches the end of its useful life,
not operate normally, take the following precautions: 29) WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK! ask a qualified service technician to properly
22) Always place the back of the television at least four
• ALWAYS turn off the TV and unplug the power (4) inches away from any vertical surface (such as a
Never spill liquids or push objects of dispose of the TV.
cord to avoid possible electric shock or fire. wall) to allow proper ventilation. any kind into the TV cabinet slots.
• NEVER allow your body to come in contact with
any broken glass or liquid from the damaged 23) Never allow anything to rest on or roll over the power 30) While it is thundering, do not touch the connecting
television. The LCD panel inside the TV contains cord, and never place the TV where the power cord cables or apparatus.
glass and a toxic liquid. If the liquid comes in contact is subject to wear or abuse.
with your mouth or eyes, or your skin is cut by 31) For added protection of your TV from lightning and
broken glass, rinse the affected area thoroughly with 24) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords. power surges, always unplug the power cord and
water and consult your doctor.
• ALWAYS contact a service technician to inspect 25) Always operate the TV with a 120V AC, 60Hz power source only. disconnect the antenna from the TV if you leave the
the TV any time it has been damaged or dropped. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not use the TV unattended or unused for long periods of time.
14b) WARNING: To prevent the spread of fire, keep polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle, or other outlet
candles or other open flames away from this product unless the blades can be inserted completely with three-wire
grounding type to prevent blade exposure.
at all times.
4 5
Introduction
Precautions Precautions (Continued)/Notes on discs

Choosing a location for your LCD TV Important notes about your LCD TV Notes on moisture condensation On handling discs
Q Retractable pedestal stand and locating the LCD TV The following symptoms are technical limitations of LCD Moisture condensation damages the unit. Please Do not touch the playback side of the disc.
Observe the following safety precautions: Display technology and are not an indication of malfunction;
read the following carefully. For example, handle the disc so that it is shown in
Introduction
therefore, Toshiba is not responsible for perceived defects
1) Ensure that unpacking and transfer of the unit is carried out by resulting from these symptoms. Moisture condensation occurs, for example, when you figure below.
two or more people.
pour a cold drink into a glass on a warm day and drops
2) Put the LCD TV on a large level area in a recumbent posture. 1) An after image (ghost) may appear on the screen if a fixed,
3) Grab the pedestal stand and lift the display up. Confirm the pivot is non-moving image is displayed for a long period of time. of water form on the outside of the glass. In the same
locked. The after image is not permanent and will disappear in a short way, moisture may condense on this unit·s internal optical
4) Place the TV on a sturdy, level surface that period of time. pick-up lens, one of the most crucial internal parts of the unit. Playback side
can support the weight of the TV. 2) The LCD panel contained in this TV is manufactured using an Do not attach paper or tape to discs.
5) Be sure to secure the TV to a wall stud, extremely high level of precision technology; however, there may
le of mo
pillar, surface, or other immovable be an occasional pixel (dot of light) that does not operate properly Examp ensat isture
structure. To secure the TV in this manner: (does not light, remains constantly lit, etc.). This is a structural cond ion!
(1) attach a clip to an immovable structure, property of LCD technology, is not a sign of malfunction, and is
then (2) pass a sturdy strap through the clip not covered under your warranty. Such pixels are not visible
and attach each end to the hooks located when the picture is viewed from a normal viewing distance.
at the back of the TV. Be sure to leave at least 4 inches between Note: Interactive video games that involve shooting a “gun” type Optical pick-up On cleaning discs
the TV and the wall or similar structure for ventilation. See item of joystick at an on-screen target may not work on this TV. lens
19, page 4 for additional details. Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and
Q To fold the pedestal stand sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center
Q Moisture condensation may occur in the following outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc
1) Slide the lever on the back side of the pedestal stand to the left. Notes on handling situations: clean.
2) Lay the display down.
Slide the lever to the left Q Do not subject the LCD panel to physical shock, such as dropping
it. It may cause unit damage and malfunction. When you move the unit from a cold area to a warm area.
Q When shipping the unit, the original shipping carton and packing
materials come in handy. For fully protection, repack the unit as it
When you use the unit in a room in which the heat
was originally packed at the factory.
Q Do not use volatile liquids, such as insecticide, near the unit. was just turned on. Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner,
Do not leave rubber or plastic products in contact with the unit for benzine, commercially available cleaners or antistatic
prolonged periods of time. When you use the unit in an area where cold air from spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc.
Back side of the pedestal stand Doing so will leave marks on the finish.
Q The top and rear panels of the unit may become warm after a long an air conditioner directly hits the unit.
NOTE: Do not operate the LCD TV while the pedestal stand
is folded. period of use. This is not a malfunction. On storing discs
Q When the unit is not in use, always remove the disc and turn off When you use the unit in a humid area.
Q To Display your LCD TV using a Wall Bracket:
the power.
If you decide to wall mount your LCD TV, always use a UL Listed
Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight
wall bracket appropriate for the size and weight of the LCD TV (see or near heat sources.
page 2): Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and
1) CAUTION: Two people are required for installation.
Notes on locating the unit dust such as a bathroom or near a humidifier.
2) Unplug and remove any cables and/or other component
Q When you place this unit near a TV, radio, or VCR, the playback
Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing
connectors from the rear of the TV. objects on discs outside of their case may cause
picture may become poor and the sound may be distorted. In this
3) Follow the instructions provided with your wall bracket. warping.
case, place the unit away from the TV, radio, or VCR.
Before proceeding, make sure the appropriate bracket(s) are
Q To avoid damage to this product, never place or store the
attached to the wall and the back of the TV as described in the
TV/DVD in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas; or areas subject to
instructions provided with the wall bracket.
excessive dust or vibration. Structure of disc contents
4) After attaching the appropriate bracket(s) to the wall and the back
of the TV, remove the pedestal stand from the TV as described
below.
Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and
the titles are sub-divided into chapters. Video CDs and
Q Removing the Pedestal Stand Q Never use the unit when moisture condensation Audio CDs are divided into tracks.
1) Carefully lay the front of the unit face down on a flat, cushioned may occur
surface such as a quilt or blanket. Leave the stand protruding DVD video disc
over the edge of the surface. Using the unit when moisture condensation exists may DVD video disc
NOTE: Extreme care should always be used when removing damage discs and internal parts. Connect the power Title 1 Title 2
the pedestal stand to avoid damage to the LCD panel. cord of the unit to the wall outlet, turn on the unit, Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3
2) Remove the two screws shown in the diagram below. remove the disc, and leave it for two or three hours.
This will allow removal of the pedestal stand.
3) Once you have removed all two screws holding the pedestal
After two or three hours, the unit will have warmed up
stand in place, remove the pedestal stand from the TV by sliding and evaporated any moisture. Leaving the TV
the pedestal stand away from the TV. connected to the wall outlet will help prevent moisture
condensation in the TV or DVD Player. Video CD/Audio CD
Video CD/Audio CD
Wa Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5
it!
Wall outlet
Each title, chapter or track is assigned a number, which

Two screws
is called “title number”, “chapter number” or “track
number” respectively.
There may be discs that do not have these numbers.
6 7
Introduction
Notes on discs (Continued) Contents

Introduction Basic playback
Notes on copyright Playable discs
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS................................ 4 Playing a disc ................................................. 44
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision This unit can play the following discs. Precautions....................................................... 6
Introduction
of copyrighted materials including, without limitation, Notes on discs .................................................. 7
television programs, videotapes, and DVDs, is prohibited Disc Mark Contents
Disc Maximum Advanced playback
under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other
Size playback time Contents ........................................................... 9 Zooming.......................................................... 47
countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. Approx. 4 hours Identification of controls ..................................10
(single sided disc)
Locating desired scene................................... 47
Audio 12 cm Marking desired scenes.................................. 48
Approx. 8 hours
About this owner·s manual DVD
video
+
Video
(double sided disc) Connections Repeat playback ............................................. 49
discs (moving Approx. 80 minutes
Antenna connections ...................................... 14 A-B Repeat playback ...................................... 49
This owner·s manual explains the basic instructions of this pictures) (single sided disc)
8 cm Cable TV connections .................................... 15 Program playback........................................... 50
unit. Some DVD video discs are produced in a manner Approx. 160 minutes
that allows specific or limited operation during playback. As (double sided disc) Connecting to optional equipment .................. 16 Random playback ........................................... 50
such, the unit may not respond to all operating command. Audio Approx. 74 minutes Power source.................................................. 20 Changing angles..............................................51
This is not a defect in the unit. Refer to instruction notes of +
12 cm
(single sided disc) Title selection ...................................................51
discs. Video
Video DVD menu .......................................................51
CDs
The following symbol may appear on the TV screen during DIGITAL VIDEO (moving
8 cm
Approx. 20 minutes Basic setup Changing soundtrack language .......................52
pictures) (single sided disc)
operation. Auto setup ...................................................... 21
Approx. 74 minutes
Subtitles ...........................................................52
Audio
12 cm
(single sided disc) Setting the language....................................... 22 Disc status .......................................................53
It means that the operation is not permitted by the TV/DVD Audio
CDs Approx. 20 minutes To memorize channels.................................... 23 To turn off the PBC ..........................................53
or the disc. 8 cm
(single sided disc)
For example, sometimes it is unable to stop the playback MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®
of copyright message of the disc when the STOP (Q) Audio
+
12 cm TV operation and Audio CD operation ..................................54
button is pressed. Alternatively, this symbol may also DivX ®
Video
It depends on DivX® Repeat, random and program playback
indicate that the feature is not available for the disc. quality TV operation ................................................... 26
(moving using file browser.............................................58
8 cm Labeling channels........................................... 28
pictures)
Notes on region numbers The following discs are also available.
Labeling video inputs ...................................... 29
DVD-R/RW discs of DVD video format Setting the V-Chip........................................... 30 Function setup
The region number of this unit is 1. If region numbers, CD-R/CD-RW discs of CD-DA, Video CD, MP3, WMA, Setting the closed captions............................. 34 Customizing the function settings ....................60
which stand for their playable area, are printed on your JPEG or DivX® format CC advanced .................................................. 35
DVD video disc and you do not find 1 or ALL , disc
Temporary cancel the rating level
Kodak Picture CD and FUJICOLOR CD format Adjusting the picture preference ..................... 36
playback will not be allowed by the player. (In this case, by DVD disc .....................................................65
Some of these discs may be incompatible. Picture settings ............................................... 36
the unit will display a message on-screen.)
Some DVDs that have no region code label may still be • You cannot play discs other than those listed above. Viewing the wide-screen picture formats ........ 37 Others
subject to area restrictions and therefore not playable. • You cannot play discs of DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, CD- Film Mode ....................................................... 38
ROM, Photo CD, etc., or non standardized discs even Understanding the Power Return feature ........66
if they may be labeled as above. DNR ................................................................ 38
On Video CDs Picture control adjustment in the PC mode .... 39 Troubleshooting ...............................................66
• Some CD-R/RWs cannot be played back depending
on the recording conditions. Sound control adjustment ............................... 40 Reception disturbances ...................................68
This unit supports Video CDs equipped with the PBC • This unit uses the NTSC color system, and cannot Language code list ..........................................69
(Version 2.0) function. (PBC is the abbreviation of Selecting Stereo/Second Audio Program (SAP) .... 40
play DVD video discs recorded in any other color Specifications ..................................................70
Playback Control.) You can enjoy two playback variations system (PAL, SECAM, etc.). Selecting the audio language ......................... 41
depending on types of discs. • This unit can play an 8cm disc. Please do not use a Selecting the HDMI audio input source .......... 41 Limited United States Warranty .......................71
• Video CD not equipped with PBC function (Version 1.1) disc adapter. It may cause trouble. Using the aspect feature................................. 42
Sound and movie can be played on this unit in the same • Please do not insert any disc of an irregular shape into Adjusting the back lighting .............................. 42
way as a DVD. the unit, as it may interfere with the function of the unit.
• Video CD equipped with PBC function (Version 2.0) You may not be able to remove it. Setting the Auto Shut Off ................................ 43
In addition to operation of a Video CD not equipped with • Please do not use after market accessories, such as a Resetting your settings ................................... 43
the PBC function, you can enjoy playback of interactive ring protector, as this may cause trouble with the
software with search function by using the menu operation of the unit.
displayed on the TV screen (Menu Playback). Some of
the functions described in this owner·s manual may not Because of problems and errors that can occur during the
work with some discs. creation of DVD and CD Software and/or the manufacture
of DVD and CD discs, Toshiba cannot assure that the
DVD player contained in this TV will successfully play
every disc bearing the DVD and CD logos.
If you happen to experience any difficulty playing a DVD
and/or CD disc on the DVD player contained in this TV,
please contact Toshiba Customer Service.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
8 9
Introduction
Identification of controls
Introduction
Front Rear
Speaker
Remote sensor 13
POWER indicator 21 Illustration of 19LV505
Side
Left Side
Adjusting the angle of the base
Approx. 10° Approx. 3°
EJECT button 45
Disc slot 44
VOLUME (+/–) buttons 26
CHANNEL 26 Antenna jack 14 15

PLAY button 44 You can adjust the AC INPUT 20
angle of the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO
CHANNEL 26 TV-screen for 3° OUT jack 18 19
forward or for 10° HEAD PHONE jack 27
QSTOP button 44 backward from HDMI IN jack 19
vertical angle. COLORSTREAM HD IN jacks 17
MENU button 22 60 Hold the base of the PC AUDIO IN jack 20
TV while adjusting
INPUT/ENTER button 16 the angle. VIDEO/GAME IN jack 16 17 PC MONITOR IN jack 20
POWER button 21
Illustration of 19LV505
10 11
Introduction
Identification of controls (Continued)
Introduction
Remote control
Inserting batteries
The instructions in this manual describe the function on the remote control. See the page in for details.
1 Open the battery compartment
cover in the direction of the
2 Install two “R03/AAA” batteries
(supplied), paying attention to
3 Replace the compartment
cover.
arrow. the polarity indicated in the
battery compartment.
EJECT button 45 POWER button 21
TV/DVD button 44 SLEEP button 27
Direct channel selection
buttons (0-9) 26
Numbered buttons (0-9) 30
JUMP button 47
DISPLAY button 27 53
Direct channel selection button ( ) 26
CH / button 26
SUBTITLE button 52 AUDIO SELECT button 52
VOL +/– button 26
INPUT button 16 MUTE button 27 Operation
ZOOM button 47
PLAY MODE button 49 50 53 *DVD MENU button 51 • Aim the remote control at the remote sensor and press control buttons to operate.
ENTER button 21 • Operate the remote control within 30° angle on either side of the remote sensor, up to a distance of approx. 5 meters.
PLAY button 44
Direction buttons ( / / / ) 21
MENU button 22
SETUP button 60 EXIT/CANCEL button 21
PAUSE button 45
CH RTN button 27 STOP button 44
SKIP ( ) button 46 CLOSED CAPTION button 34
SKIP ( )button 46
REV button 46
FF button 46 SLOW ( ) button 46
SLOW ( ) button 46 MARKER button 48 Approx. 5 meters
TOP MENU button 51 ANGLE button 51
RETURN button 55 60 REPEAT A-B button 49
GAME button 16 PIC SIZE button 37
Caution:
• Never throw batteries into a fire.
SE-R0305 Note:
• Be sure to use AAA size batteries.
• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.
• Batteries should always be disposed of with the environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in accordance with
*DVD MENU button applicable laws and regulations.
Use the DVD MENU button to • If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if the operating range becomes reduced, replace batteries with
display the menu included on new ones.
many DVD video discs. • When necessary to replace batteries in the remote control, always replace both batteries with new ones.
To operate a menu, follow the Never mix battery types or use new and used batteries in combination.
instructions in “DVD menu.” 51 • Always remove batteries from remote control if they are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for an extended
period of time. This will prevent battery acid from leaking into the battery compartment.
12 13
Connections
Antenna connections Cable TV connections

If you are using an indoor or outdoor antenna, follow the instructions below that correspond to your antenna system. This TV/DVD has an extended tuning range and can tune most cable channels without using a Cable TV converter box.
If you are using a cable TV service (CABLE), see page 15 for Cable TV connections. Some cable companies offer “premium pay channels” in which the signal is scrambled. Descrambling these signals for
normal viewing requires the use of a descrambler device which is generally provided by the cable company.
Combination VHF/UHF antenna (Single 75 ohm cable or 300 ohm twin-lead wire) For subscribers to basic cable TV service
Antenna For basic cable service not requiring a converter/descrambler

Connect the 75 ohm cable from the combination jack
Connections
Antenna
box, connect the Cable TV 75 ohm coaxial cable directly to the
Antenna VHF/UHF antenna to the antenna jack on the back
jack Antenna jack on the back of the TV/DVD.
jack
of the TV/DVD.
75 ohm
If your combination VHF/UHF antenna has a 300 coaxial cable
75 ohm coaxial cable ohm twin-lead wire, use the 300-75 ohm matching
(not supplied) transformer (not supplied).
300-75 ohm matching

transformer (not supplied)
For subscribers to scrambled cable TV service
If you subscribe to a cable TV service which requires the use of a converter/descrambler box, connect the
incoming 75 ohm coaxial cable to the converter/descrambler box. Using another 75 ohm coaxial cable, connect
the output jack of the converter/descrambler box to the antenna jack on the TV/DVD. Follow the connections
shown below. Set the TV/DVD to the output channel of the converter/descrambler box (usually channel 3 or 4)
Combination VHF/UHF antenna (Separate VHF and UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wires) and use the converter/descrambler box to select channels.
Antenna Connect the UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire to the

jack 300-75 ohm matching combiner (not supplied). Connect the VHF 300 ohm Antenna
transformer (not supplied) twin-lead wire to the 300-75 ohm matching transformer Incoming 75 ohm 75 ohm cable to jack
Cable TV TV/DVD
(not supplied). Attach the transformer to the combiner, Converter/
then attach the combiner to the antenna jack on the descrambler
back of the TV/DVD.
Combiner
(not supplied)
UHF 300 ohm VHF 300 ohm

twin-lead wire twin-lead wire
(not supplied) For subscribers to unscrambled basic cable TV service with scrambled
(not supplied)
premium channels
If you subscribe to a cable TV service in which basic channels are unscrambled and premium channels require
Separate VHF/UHF antennas (75 ohm VHF cable and 300 ohm UHF twin-lead wires) the use of a converter/descrambler box, you may wish to use a signal splitter and an A/B Switch box (available
from the cable company or an electronics supply store). Follow the connections shown below. With the switch in
the “B” position, you can directly tune any nonscrambled channels on your TV/DVD. With the switch in the “A”
Connect the VHF 75 ohm cable and UHF 300 ohm position, tune your TV/DVD to the output of the converter/descrambler box (usually channel 3 or 4) and use the
Antenna twin-lead wire to the combiner (not supplied). converter/descrambler box to tune scrambled channels.
jack Attach the combiner to the antenna jack on the back
of the TV/DVD.
VHF 75 ohm Converter/
(not supplied) Incoming descrambler
75 ohm 75 ohm cable Antenna
jack
Combiner Cable TV to TV/DVD
Splitter A/B switch A
(not supplied) B
UHF 300 ohm

twin-lead wire
(not supplied)
14 15
Connections
0-5
Connecting to optional equipment CH /
You can enjoy VCR, camcorder or TV game with connection to external input. INPUT
GAME
Using the audio/video inputs

Press INPUT to view a signal from another device connected to your TV/DVD, such Source Selection Connecting to an optional equipment with S-video output
as a VCR player. You can select TV, Video, ColorStream HD, HDMI or PC depending 0.TV
on which input jacks you used to connect your devices. 1.Video

If you connect a VCR with an S-Video cable to the S-VIDEO IN jack on the left side of the TV/DVD, you must
Connections
2.ColorStream HD
3.HDMI also connect the audio cables to the AUDIO IN jacks as shown below. The S-Video cable only carries the video
Press INPUT on the remote control to display the current signal source. 4.PC signal. The audio signal is separated.
5.DVD
To change the input source, press INPUT again or press 0-4. (5 is for selection DVD Select the “Video” by pressing INPUT repeatedly.
mode.) [0-5]:Select
To S-VIDEO IN Back side
(white)
Connecting to a VCR : Signal flow
Ex. VCR with S-Video
To playback from the VCR, connect the VCR to the TV/DVD as shown.
Select the “Video” by pressing INPUT repeatedly. (playback)
VCR (yellow) Back side
: Signal flow (red)
(white) To Audio (L/R) OUT To S-VIDEO OUT
(red) To VIDEO/GAME IN
To VIDEO/GAME IN S-Video cable (not supplied)
To AUDIO (L/R) IN
To Audio/Video OUT
Audio cable (not supplied)
Audio/Video cable (not supplied)
Note:
• When the S-Video cable and the standard video cable are connected at the same time, the S-video cable takes
precedence.
Connecting to a camcorder
To playback from the camcorder, connect the camcorder to the TV/DVD as shown. Connecting an optional equipment with ColorStream® (Component video) output
Select the “Video” by pressing INPUT repeatedly.
Your TV/DVD is capable of using ColorStream® (component video). Connecting your TV/DVD to a component
: Signal flow (yellow) Back side video compatible DVD player, such as a Toshiba DVD player with ColorStream® can greatly enhance picture
Camcorder (white) quality and performance.
(red) Select the “ColorStream HD” by pressing INPUT repeatedly.
To VIDEO/GAME IN
To Audio/Video OUT
Audio/Video cable (not supplied) Ex. DVD player with Component video Back side
: Signal flow To COLORSTREAM HD

(Y, PB, PR) IN
Connecting to a TV Game
To Component Video OUT
You can enjoy playing a TV game on the screen by adjusting to the suitable brightness for your eyes. To Audio (L/R) OUT
1. Connect a TV Game to the TV/DVD. Component video cable
2. Select the Game mode by pressing GAME. The Game mode screen appears. (not supplied)
(white) (red)
• If GAME is pressed during standby mode, the unit turns on automatically and the Game mode screen
Audio cable (not supplied) To COLORSTREAM HD
appears on the screen.
AUDIO (L/R) IN
: Signal flow (yellow) Back side
(white) When using the Component video cable,
To Audio/Video OUT (red) To VIDEO/GAME IN an Audio cable must be connected to
COLORSTREAM HD AUDIO(L/R) IN jacks.
Audio/Video cable (not supplied) Note:
• The ColorStream® (component video) inputs on this unit are for use with devices that output 480i, 1080i inter-
Note: laced signals and 480p, 720p progressive signals.
• You can also change the TV/DVD screen to the desired mode by pressing the CH / .
• The TV/DVD can also be used as a display device for many video games. However, due to the wide variety of • Refer to the owner·s manual of the connected equipment as well.
different types of signal generated by these devices and subsequent hook-up variations required, they have not all • When you connect the unit to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment
been included in the suggested connection diagrams. You·ll need to consult each component·s Owner·s Manual from the wall outlet before making any connections.
for additional information. • If you place the unit near a tuner or radio, the radio broadcast sound might be distorted. In this case, place the
• Interactive video games that involve shooting a “gun” type of joystick at on-screen target may not work on this unit away from the tuner and radio.
TV/DVD.
16 17
Connections
Connecting to optional equipment (Continued)

You can enjoy high quality dynamic sounds by connecting the * This section uses the following reference mark.
TV/DVD to optional audio equipment.
: Front speaker : Center speaker
: Rear speaker : Signal flow
: Sub woofer
Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a Dolby® Digital decoder Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a digital audio input
Dolby Digital 2 channel digital stereo
Connections
Dolby Digital is the surround sound technology used in theaters showing the latest movies, and is now available to reproduce You can enjoy the dynamic sound of 2 channel digital stereo by connecting an amplifier equipped with a digital audio input and speaker
this realistic effect in the home. You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the Dolby Digital system (right and left front speakers).
Note: PCM audio is limited to DVD or CD playback.
recording system with this dynamic realistic sound by connecting the TV/DVD to a 6 channel amplifier equipped with a Dolby Back side
Digital decoder or Dolby Digital processor. If you have a Dolby Surround Pro Logic decoder, you will obtain the full benefit of
Amplifier equipped with a To COAXIAL DIGITAL
Pro Logic from the same DVD movies that provide full 5.1-channel Dolby Digital soundtracks, as well as from titles with the AUDIO OUT
Digital audio input
Dolby Surround mark.
Back side To COAXIAL
type digital
Amplifier equipped with a To COAXIAL DIGITAL audio input
Dolby Digital decoder AUDIO OUT
75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)
To COAXIAL
type digital Manufactured under license Note:
audio input from Dolby Laboratories. • DO NOT connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the TV/DVD to the AC-3 RF input of a Dolby Digital Receiver.
Dolby and the double-D symbol This input on your A/V Receiver is reserved for Laserdisc use only and is incompatible with the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack
75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied) are trademarks of Dolby of the TV/DVD.
Laboratories. • Connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the TV/DVD to the “COAXIAL” input of a Receiver or Processor.
• Refer to the owner·s manual of the connected equipment as well.
• When you connect the TV/DVD to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet
before making any connections.
• The output sound of the TV/DVD has a wide dynamic range. Be sure to adjust the receiver·s volume to a moderate listening level.
Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a DTS® decoder Otherwise, the speakers and your hearing may be damaged by a sudden high volume sound.
• Turn off the amplifier before you connect or disconnect the TV/DVD·s power cord. If you leave the amplifier·s power on, the speakers
Digital Theater Systems (DTS) may be damaged.
DTS is a high quality surround technology used in theaters and now available for home use, on DVD video discs or audio CDs.
If you have a DTS decoder or processor, you can obtain the full benefit of 5.1 channel DTS encoded sound tracks on DVD Connecting to an HDMI or a DVI device
video discs or audio CDs.
Back side About HDMI
To COAXIAL DIGITAL HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports both video HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-
Amplifier equipped with AUDIO OUT and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players, definition video plus standard to multi-channel surround-sound
a DTS decoder DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed audio. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a
Manufactured under license to provide the technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content bandwidth of up to 2.2 gigabytes per second (with HDTV signals),
To COAXIAL under U.S. Patent #: 5,451,942 & Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and
type digital other U.S. and worldwide specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted communication between the AV source and AV devices such as
patents issued & pending. DTS and received by DVI-compliant or HDMI-compliant displays. DTVs.
audio input
and DTS Digital Out are
75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied) registered trademarks and the HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC.
trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Back side
© 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Connecting to an amplifier equipped with an MPEG audio decoder

To PC AUDIO IN To HDMI IN
MPEG2 sound To DVI output
You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the MPEG2 recording system with dynamic
realistic sound by connecting an amplifier equipped with an MPEG2 audio decoder or MPEG2 audio processor. Audio cord (not supplied)
DVI device HDMI - to - DVI adapter cable
(HDMI type A connector)
Back side
Amplifier equipped with an To COAXIAL DIGITAL (not supplied)
MPEG2 audio decoder AUDIO OUT
or HDMI cable (type A connector)
HDMI device
To COAXIAL
type digital (not supplied)
To HDMI out
audio input
Note:
75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied) • You must select the corresponding audio input source (HDMI or DVI) on the menu screen (see ”Selecting the HDMI audio
input source” on page 41). Otherwise you will only see the image with no sound.
18 19
Connections
Connecting to optional equipment (Continued)/ Auto Setup POWER
The Auto Setup function helps to install your TV/DVD easily.

Power source It leads you the Language selection, Air/Cable selection and Automatic
channel search.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the antenna or cable TV system
connection is made!
Connecting to a PC (Personal Computer) ENTER
/ / /
Before you connect this TV/DVD to your PC, change the adjustment of your PC’s Resolution and Refresh rate (60 Hz). EXIT/CANCEL
Connect one end of a (male to male) VGA cable to the video card of the computer and the other end to the VGA connector PC
MONITOR on the rear of the TV/DVD. Attach the connectors firmly with the screws on the plug. In case of a Multimedia computer,
connect the audio cord to the audio output of your Multimedia computer and to the AUDIO connector of the PC AUDIO IN jack of
the TV/DVD.
Auto Setup
Select “PC” by pressing INPUT repeatedly.
Switch on the computer. The TV/DVD can operate as the computer monitor
To turn on the TV/DVD, press POWER.
1 5 Now the “Automatic Search” starts.
Basic setup
Back side • POWER indicator on the front of the unit
Auto Setup
Monitor Display modes changes green. It may take approx. 10 seconds
Language English
MODE Resolution Refresh rate for a picture to appear on screen.
Signal Type Cable
VGA 640x480 60Hz Automatic Search Start
VGA 720x400 70Hz Analog Channel Found : 0

SVGA 800x600 60Hz Digtal Channel Found : 0
To PC AUDIO IN jack XGA 1024x768 60Hz Auto Setup menu appears on the screen.
To PC
Audio cord (not supplied)
WXGA
WXGA
1280x768
1280x720
60Hz
60Hz
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Language”, then
press ϵ or ϶ to select your desired language. • If you press EXIT/CANCEL, the Automatic
EXIT : End
WXGA 1360x768 60Hz Auto Setup Search stops and changes to the TV screen.
MONITOR IN
Language English • After the starting setup is completed, the TV
VGA cable (not supplied) To return to normal mode Signal Type Cable channel appears on the screen.
Note: Press INPUT again. Automatic Search Start
• The on-screen displays will have a different appearance in PC mode than in TV mode.
Note:
• If there is no video signal from the PC when the unit is in PC mode, “No signal” will appear on the TV/DVD-screen.
• The Auto Setup function will work only when you
press POWER for the first time.
Power source : Select : Adjust
• The process of “Automatic Search” may take 15 to
30 minutes to complete, depending on your regional
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Signal Type”, then
To use AC power source
1. Connect the AC cord plug into this TV/DVD’s AC INPUT jack.
2. Connect the AC cord into an AC outlet.
3 press ϵ or ϶ to select “Air” or “Cable”.
Auto Setup
cable service.
Illustration of
Language English
19LV505 Signal Type Cable
AC Outlet Automatic Search Start
Wider Hole
and Blade
: Select : Adjust
Air - VHF/UHF channels

Cable - Cable TV channels
AC cord (supplied)
AC 120V, 60Hz
4 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Automatic Search”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.
Auto Setup
Language English
Note: Signal Type Cable
• Never connect the AC line cord plug to other than the specified voltage (120V 60Hz). Use the attached power cord only. Automatic Search Start
• If the polarized AC cord does not fit into a non-polarized AC outlet, do not attempt to file or cut the blade. It is the user’s
responsibility to have an electrician replace the obsolete outlet.
• If you cause a static discharge when touching the unit and the unit fails to function, simply unplug the unit from the AC outlet
and plug it back in. The unit should return to normal operation. : Select ENTER:Set
• If the AC cord plug is plugged in for the first time, wait for approx. 5 seconds before pressing POWER.
20 21
Basic setup
Setting the language POWER

To memorize channels
This TV/DVD can display the on screen language in English, French or This TV/DVD is equipped with a channel memory feature which allows channels
Spanish. to skip up or down to the next channel set into memory, skipping over unwanted
Select the language you prefer first, then proceed with the other menu options. channels. Before selecting channels, they must be programmed into the
MENU TV/DVD·s memory. To use this TV/DVD with an antenna, set the Signal Type
option to the Air mode. When shipped from the factory, this menu option is in
ENTER ENTER
the Cable mode.
/ / / / / /
EXIT/CANCEL EXIT/CANCEL
MENU
Setting the language Air/Cable selection Automatic search

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
1
4
Press ϵ or ϶ to select the desired language:
1
1
Basic setup
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
• POWER indicator on the front of the unit English, French (Français) or Spanish
“Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER. “Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
changes green. It may take approx. 10 seconds (Español).
for a picture to appear on screen.
Main Menu Main Menu
Picture Picture
Audio Audio
Channel Channel
Press MENU. The TV menu screen will
2 appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Setup”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
Lock
Setup
Lock
Setup
: Select ENTER:Set
: Select ENTER:Set
Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

Main Menu
5 screen.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Auto Ch Memory”,
Picture
Audio
Channel
2 then press ϶ or ENTER.
2
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Auto Ch Memory”,
Channel
Lock
Channel
Setup Note: Add/Delete >>
• If the unit does not operate properly, or No key Add/Delete >> Auto Ch Memory >>
: Select ENTER:Set Auto Ch Memory Ch Label >>
operation (by the unit and/or the remote control): >>
Ch Label >>
Static electricity, etc., may affect the TV/DVD’s
operation. In such case, disconnect the AC cord once,
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Language”.
3 Setup
then connect it again.
• If no buttons are pressed for more than about 60
seconds, the MENU screen will return to normal 3
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Signal Type”. : Select ENTER:Set
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Automatic Search”,

Closed Caption
Language
Video Label
>>
English
>>
operation automatically.
• The TV section has its own menu and the DVD
section also has its own menu 60 .
Auto Ch Memory 3 then press ϶ or ENTER.
Auto Ch Memory
Signal Type Cable
Backlight 16
Automatic Search Start Signal Type Cable
Auto Shut Off Off
Aspect On Automatic Search Stop
Reset >>
: Select : Adjust
Analog Channel Found : 0
Press ϵ or ϶ to select “Air” or “Cable”.
4 Auto Ch Memory
Digital Channel Found : 0
: Select ENTER:Cancel
The TV/DVD will begin memorizing all the

4
Signal Type Air
Automatic Search Start
channels available in your area.
Air - VHF/UHF channels

Cable - Cable TV channels

5 screen.
22 23
Basic setup
To memorize channels (Continued)
ENTER ENTER
/ / / / /
MENU MENU
Add/Delete channel Adding Channel Clear All

You can select the channel that you want to skip. If you find a new channel unregistered, you can add the All channels are deleted from the channel memory.
Basic setup
new channel into the channel memory.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select the channel that you
1
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
4 want to skip.
Add/Delete
1
Tune in the new channel.
1
“Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
Press MENU. The TV menu screen will appear.
2
CH Signal
Main Menu
2 Analog Add Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Channel”, then press Main Menu
Picture 3 Analog Add
3-001 Digital Delete
϶ or ENTER.
Audio Picture
3-002 Digital Add
Channel Audio
4 Analog Delete
Lock Main Menu Channel
Setup : Select : Adjust Lock
Picture
Setup
: Select ENTER:Set Audio
Press ϵ or ϶ to select “Add” or “Delete”,
5 Channel : Select ENTER:Set
whichever function you want to perform. Lock
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then
2 press ϶ or ENTER.
Channel
Add/Delete
CH Signal
: Select
Setup
ENTER:Set
2
press ϶ or ENTER.
2 Analog Delete
Add/Delete >> 3 Analog Add Channel
3
Auto Ch Memory >> 3-001 Digital Delete
Add/Delete >>
Ch Label >> 3-002 Digital Add press ϶ or ENTER. Auto Ch Memory >>
4 Analog Delete
Ch Label >>
Channel
: Select : Adjust
Add/Delete >>
: Select ENTER:Set
Auto Ch Memory >>
Repeat steps 4 - 5 for other channels you
3
press ϶ or ENTER.
6 want to add or delete.
Ch Label >> : Select
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Clear All”, then press

ENTER:Set
Add/Delete
Adding Channel >>
7
screen. : Select ENTER:Set 3 ϶ or ENTER.
Add/Delete
Add/Delete >>
Adding Channel >>
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Adding Channel”,
Clear All >>
4 then press ϶ or ENTER. The new channel will

be added into the channel memory.
Add/Delete
Clear All
>>
>>
Add/Delete
: Select ENTER:Set
Adding Channel >>
Add/Delete >> : Select ENTER:Set
Clear All >>

4 screen.
: Select ENTER:Set

5 screen.
24 25
TV operation
POWER SLEEP
TV operation
0–9, –
DISPLAY
VOL +/–
VOL +/–
MUTE
CH /
CH RTN
TV operation TV operation (continued)

1 (POWER indicator on the front of the unit changes
green. It may take approx. 10 seconds for a picture
TO SELECT ANALOG CHANNELS
1-9: Press 1-9 as needed. Example, to
select channel 2, press 2.
Ϯ DISPLAY
Press DISPLAY to display the current information on the
screen.
Ϯ SLEEP
To set the TV/DVD to
turn off after a preset
S l e e p Ti m e r
0h 10m
to appear on screen.) 10-99: Press the 2 digits in order. Example, to amount of time, press
select channel 12, press 1, 2. SLEEP on the remote
TV operation
100-125: Press the 3 digits in order. Example, to control. The clock will
select channel 120, press 1, 2, 0. count up 10 minutes for
62-001 HDTV Moving Picture1
CH-1
Sleep Timer
Off each press of the SLEEP button (Off, 0h 10m, 0h 20m,
Digital Air English
Adjust the volume level by pressing VOL + or – . ..., 2h 0m). After the sleep time is programmed, the
2 The volume level will be indicated on the screen
by orange bars. As the volume level increases, so
TO SELECT DIGITAL CHANNELS
Press the first 3 digits, then press the – button,
followed by the remaining number.
When the TV/DVD
receives a digital signal,
No Program Information is available
display will appear briefly every ten minutes to remind

you that the sleep timer is operating. To confirm the
sleep timer setting, press SLEEP and the remaining
do the number of bars. If the volume decreases, Example, to select channel 015-001, press 0, 1, the digital information Natural
1080i
the number of orange bars also decreases. will appear. time will be displayed for a few seconds. To cancel the
5, –, 1.
sleep timer, press SLEEP repeatedly until the display
• If a channel is selected with only audio content, • Channel number • Station name
turns to Off.
“Audio only” will be displayed on the screen. • Channel label (if preset) • Broadcast program name
• If a channel is selected with a weak digital • V-Chip rating • Signal type
signal, “Digital channel signal strength is low” • Sleep timer • Audio language Ϯ HEAD PHONES
• Program guide • Picture size Insert a stereo headphones (not supplied) with a 1/8” mini
will be displayed on the screen.
• Resolution plug into the HEAD PHONE jack on the rear panel.
The same program may be available on either
If you connect headphones, the sound from TV/DVD
Set the Signal Type option to the appropriate an analog channel or a digital channel. You may
3 speakers is muted.
14 Sleep Timer
Off
position (see “Air/Cable selection” on page 23). choose to watch either format. Analog Cable
• If a channel is selected to which you have not When the TV/DVD

subscribed, “Digital channel is encrypted” will receives a analog signal,
Air - VHF/UHF channels be displayed on the screen. the analog information Natural
Cable - Cable TV channels 480i
will appear.
VHF/UHF/CABLE CHANNELS • Channel number • Channel label (if preset)
Press the Direct Channel Selection (0-9, –)
4 buttons or CH / to select the channel.
(If you press only channel number, channel
Air
VHF
2-13
Cable
VHF
2-13
• V-Chip rating
• Sleep timer
• Picture size
• Signal type
• Audio information (Stereo or SAP)
• Resolution
selection will be delayed for a few seconds.)
UHF STD/HRC/IRC Press DISPLAY again to clear the call display.
14-69 14-36 (A) (W) Note:
37-59 (AA) (WW) • After a few seconds, DISPLAY screen will return to
60-85 (AAA) (ZZZ) normal TV-operation automatically.
86-94 (86) (94)
95-99 (A-5) (A-1) Ϯ CH RTN
100-125 (100) (125) This button allows you to go back to the last channel
01 (5A) selected by pressing CH RTN. Press CH RTN again to
return to the last channel you were watching.
Note:
• If a channel with no broadcast is selected, the sound
will automatically be muted.
• It may take a few seconds for a digital channel picture Ϯ MUTE
to appear on screen after being selected. Press MUTE to switch off the sound. The TV/DVD’s
sound will be silenced and “Mute” will appear on the
screen. The sound can be switched back on by pressing
this button again or the VOL + or –.
26 27
TV operation
Labeling channels Labeling video inputs

Channel label appear with the channel number display each time you turn on the The Video Label feature allows you to label each input source for your TV/DVD.
TV/DVD, select a channel, or press DISPLAY.
You can choose any four characters to identify a channel.
ENTER
ENTER
/ / /
/ / /
EXIT/CANCEL
MENU EXIT/CANCEL
MENU
Labeling channels Labeling video inputs
1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

“Channel” menu, then press ϶ or ENTER.
4 Press ϵ or ϶ repeatedly until the character
you want appears in the first space. 1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
“Setup”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
4 Press ϵ or ϶ to select the desired label for
that input source.
Ch Label Video Label
TV operation
Channel Number 15-1 Video -
Main Menu Main Menu
Ch Label A ColorStream HD SAT
Picture Label Clear >> HDMI -
Picture
Audio Audio
Channel Channel
Lock Lock
Setup : Select : Adjust ENTER:Set Setup : Select : Adjust
: Select ENTER:Set : Select ENTER:Set

The characters rotation as follows:
– : Uses the default label name
- , () @ / + = - VCR : Video cassette recorder
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Ch Label”, then

press ϶ or ENTER.
The “Ch Label” menu will appear.
SPACE
If the character which you desire appears, press

2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Video Label”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
DVD
DTV
SAT
: DVD video
: Digital TV set-top box
: Satellite box
Channel
Setup CBL : Cable box
ENTER.
Closed Caption >> HD : HDMI (only for HDMI input)
Add/Delete >> Repeat this step to enter the rest of the
Language English
Auto Ch Memory >> characters. Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
Ch Label >>
If you would like a blank space in the label name,
you must choose the empty space from the list of
characters.
Video Label
Backlight
Auto Shut Off
Aspect
16
>>
Off
On
5 screen.
Reset >>
5 When you finish inputting the label name,

press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
3 Press ϵ or ϶ to select a channel you want to

label, then press ϴ.
Ch Label
screen.
3 Press ϳ or ϴ to select an input which you
want to label.
Video Label
Channel Number 15-1
Video -
Ch Label
6 Repeat steps 3-5 for other channel. You can ColorStream HD -

Label Clear >>
HDMI -
assign a label to each channel.
To clear a Ch Label
: Select : Adjust
After step 3 above, press ϳ or ϴ to select “Label Clear”, : Select : Adjust
Note:
• The channel labels will be reset after “Automatic
Search” on page 23.
28 29
TV operation
Setting the V-Chip

An age limitation can be set to restrict children from viewing or hearing 0–9 0–9
violent scenes or pictures that you may choose to exclude. The restriction
applies to “TV Rating” and “Movie Rating” if this data is transmitted. You may DISPLAY
set this restriction separately. To use the V-Chip function, you must register
a password. ENTER ENTER
Notes:
/ / / / /
If you forget the password, press DISPLAY four times within
five seconds while the TV is in password entering mode. This
allows you to reset your password. MENU MENU
To register a password To change a password To set the V-Chip

“Lock”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
4 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “V-Chip Set”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
The V-Chip Set Menu appears.
Main Menu Lock
TV operation
Main Menu Main Menu
Picture V-Chip On
Picture V-Chip Set >>
Audio Picture
V-Chip Set (DTV) >>
Audio Channel Audio
Update >>
Channel Lock Channel
Change Password >>
Lock Setup Lock
Setup Setup
: Select ENTER:Set
: Select ENTER:Set : Select ENTER: Set
: Select ENTER:Set
5 Press ϳ or ϴ to select which rating will be

used, then press ϶ or ENTER. Each rating
2 Select and enter your password (4 digits)
using Number buttons (0-9), then press
ENTER.
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Change Password”,
The Change Password screen will appear.
2 Use Number buttons (0-9) to enter your pass-
word, then press ENTER. Then Lock menu will
appear.
below will appear.
V-Chip Set
Lock Lock Lock TV Rating >>

Movie Rating >>
New Password ---- V-Chip Off Password ----
V-Chip Set >>
V-Chip Set (DTV) >>
Update >>
Change Password >>
: Select ENTER: Set

TV Rating
[0-9] : Select ENTER:Set : Select ENTER: Set [0-9] : Select ENTER:Set
TV Rating
3 Enter the same password again to confirm,

then press ENTER.
The password is now registered.
3 Enter a new password using Number buttons
(0-9), then press ENTER.
3 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “V-Chip”, then press
ϵ or ϶ to select “On” . TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
ALL D L S V FV
Change Password Lock TV-PG

Lock
New Password TV-14
---- V-Chip On
Confirm Password ---- TV-MA
Confirm Password ---- V-Chip Set >>
V-Chip Set (DTV) >> : Select ENTER:Set
Update >>
Change Password >> You can set the rating using age level and genre.
Age:
TV-Y : All children
[0-9] : Select ENTER:Set : Select : Adjust
[0-9] : Select ENTER:Set
TV-Y7 : 7 years old and above
TV-G : General audience
Note:
• The V-Chip feature is available only for the U.S. V-Chip
4 Enter the same password again to confirm,
then press ENTER.
The new password is now registered.
TV-PG : Parental guidance
TV-14 : 14 years old and above
TV-MA : 17 years old and above
system. The Canadian V-Chip system is not supported. Genre:
ALL : All
D : Dialogue
L : Language
S : Sex
V : Violence
FV : Fantasy Violence
30 31
TV operation
Setting the V-Chip (continued)

As a supplement to the standard V-Chip rating system, your television will 0–9
be able to download an additional rating system, if such a system becomes
available in the future.
MUTE
ENTER ENTER
/ / /
EXIT/CANCEL
MENU
To set the V-Chip (Continued)

To download the additional V-Chip rating system (when available)
Movie Rating
Movie Rating
G
6 You also need “Update” procedure to update
rating information.
TV operation
PG
PG-13
Note:
Main Menu • You can only download the additional V-Chip rating
R
NC-17 Picture system when your TV/DVD is receiving a digital signal.
X Audio • When you download the additional rating system, it
Channel may take some time for the download to occur.
: Select ENTER:Set
Lock • The V-Chip rating information and system are not
Setup determined or controlled by the TV/DVD.
G : All ages : Select ENTER:Set
• The standard V-Chip rating system is available
PG : Parental guidance whether your TV/DVD is receiving a digital signal or
PG-13 : Parental guidance less than 13 years old not, and will block both analog and digital programs.
R : Under 17 years old parental guidance To set the restriction level using the standard V-Chip
suggested
NC-17 : 17 years old and above
2 Use Number buttons (0-9) to enter your pass-
word, then press ENTER. Then Lock menu will
appear.
rating system, select “V-Chip Set” in step 3.
• The downloadable V-Chip rating system is an evolving
technology, and availability, content, and format may
X : Adult only
Lock vary.
6 Press ϳ/ϴ to select the desired rating, then

press ENTER.
Password ----
• You cannot select this feature if the TV/DVD is not
receiving a digital signal for the current station.
[0-9] : Select ENTER:Set
3 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “V-Chip Set (DTV)”,

7 Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen. Lock
V-Chip On
V-Chip Set >>
V-Chip Set (DTV) >>
Update >>
Change Password >>
To use the TV/DVD after it is protected.

When a program is received that is blocked by the V- : Select : Adjust
Chip, press MUTE, then enter your password.

The protection will be temporarily overridden. If the TV/
DVD is turned off or the channel is changed, the V-Chip
restriction will be reactivated.
4 If the TV/DVD is not storing the additional
rating system, the TV/DVD will begin down-
loading it, which may take some time to be
completed.
Note:
• The V-Chip function is activated only on programs and
input sources that include a rating signal. 5 Set your preferred content rating limits for the
additional rating system.
32 33
TV operation
Setting the closed captions CC advanced

WHAT IS CLOSED CAPTIONING? When you have selected Custom as the display method, you can adjust the
This television has the capability to decode and display closed captioned various setting listed below as follows:
television programs. Closed captioning will display text on the screen for
hearing impaired viewers or it will translate and display text in another This feature is designed to customize Digital Captions only.
language. ENTER ENTER
/ / / / / /
MENU MENU
CLOSED CAPTION
CC advanced
Setting the closed captions
1 Press MENU in the TV mode. Press ϳ or ϴ to
select “Setup”, then press ϶ or ENTER. 5 Press ϳ or ϴ to select the desired item,
then press ϵ or ϶ to change the setting.

select “Setup”, then press ϶ or ENTER. 4 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Analog Caption” or
“Digital Caption”, then press ϵ or ϶ to select
the desired Closed Caption mode. Main Menu
CC Advanced
Text Size Auto
TV operation
Main Menu
When you select “Analog Caption”, you can Picture Text Type Auto
Text Edge Auto
choose C1, C2, C3, C4, T1, T2, T3 and T4. Audio
Text Color Auto
Picture Channel
When you select “Digital Caption”, you can Text Opacity Auto
Audio Lock Background Color Auto
choose from CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4, CS5 and CS6. Background Opacity Auto
Channel Setup
Lock : Select : Adjust
Closed Caption : Select ENTER:Set
Setup
CC Setting On You can select from among the following items
: Select ENTER:Set CC Priority Digital CC and parameters.
Analog Caption C1
Digital Caption
Digital CC Preset
CS1
Default 2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Closed Caption”,
Text Size:
Text Type:
Auto, Small, Standard, Large
Auto, Style1, Style2, Style3,
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Closed Caption”,

The Closed Caption menu will appear.
CC Advanced
: Select
>>
: Adjust
The Closed Caption menu will appear.
Setup
Text Edge:
Style4, Style5, Style6, Style7
Auto, None, Raised, Depressed,
Uniform, Left Shadow, Right
Closed Caption >>
Setup
Shadow
5
Language English
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “CC Priority”, then Video Label >> Text Color: Auto, Black, White, Red, Green,
Closed Caption >> press ϵ or ϶ to select “Digital CC” or “Analog Backlight 16
Blue, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
Language English
CC”. Auto Shut Off Off
Video Label >> Aspect On Text Opacity: Auto, Solid, Transparent,
Backlight 16 Reset >> Translucent, Flashing
Auto Shut Off Off : Select ENTER:Set
Aspect On
Background Auto, Black, White, Red, Green,
Reset >> Color: Blue, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
: Select ENTER:Set
3 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Digital CC Preset”,
then press ϵ or ϶ to select “Custom”.
Background Auto, Solid, Transparent,
Opacity: Translucent, Flashing
3 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “CC Setting”, then

press ϵ or ϶ to select “On”.
On: Captions will be displayed on the screen. Note:
Closed Caption
CC Setting
CC Priority
On
Digital CC 6 Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.
Off: Captions will not be displayed on the screen. • Depending on the broadcast signal, some Analog Caption C1
Analog Captions will function with a Digital Digital Caption CS1
Digital CC Preset Custom
Closed Caption broadcast signal. This step prevent that two kind CC Advanced >>
CC Setting Off of captions are overlapping.
CC Priority Digital CC : Select : Adjust
Note:
Analog Caption
Digital Caption
Digital CC Preset
CC Advanced
C1
CS1
Default
>>
screen.
4 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “CC Advanced”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
• You cannnot select “CC Advanced” in the menu
before set “Digital CC preset” to “Custom”.
• You cannot set the Closed Caption “Text Color” and
The CC Advanced menu will appear. “Background Color” as the same color.
: Select : Adjust
Closed Caption
CC Setting On
Note: CC Priority Digital CC
• You can also display the Closed Caption menu screen by pressing CLOSED CAPTION on the remote control. Analog Caption C1
• Digital caption feature is not available for analog channel. Digital Caption CS1
Digital CC Preset Custom
CC Advanced >>
Important Note:
If text is not available in your viewing area, a black rectangle may appear on-screen. If this happens, set : Select : Adjust
“CC Setting” to “Off”.
34 35
TV operation
Adjusting the picture preference/ Viewing the wide-screen picture formats 0-4
You can view programs in a variety of picture sizes— Natural, Theather
Picture settings Wide1, Theather Wide2, Theather Wide3 and Full.
You can select four picture modes—Sports, Standard, Movie and Memory—
as described in the following table:
ENTER
Picture settings are factory preset but you can adjust them individually as ENTER / /
follows: / / /
EXIT/CANCEL
EXIT/CANCEL
MENU PIC SIZE
Adjusting the picture preference Picture settings Viewing the wide-screen picture formats

“Picture”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
1 Press MENU. Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture”,
Theater Wide2 picture size (for letter box
programs)
The entire picture is uniformly enlarged—it is stretched
Main Menu
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture Setting”, then
press ϶ or ENTER. 2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture Size”, then
press ϶ or ENTER to display Picture Size
menu. Press ϳ/ϴ or corresponding Number
the same amount both wider and taller (retains its
original proportion).
TV operation
Picture The Picture Setting menu will appear. button (0-4) to select the desired picture size, The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden.
Audio as described below.
Channel
Picture
Lock Picture Setting >> Picture Size
Setup Picture Preference Sports

0.Natural
Picture Size >>
1.Theater Wide1
: Select ENTER:Set Film Mode On ABCDEFG----------------
2.Theater Wide2
PC Setting >>
3.Theater Wide3
DNR On
4.Full
Note:
• This picture size is not available on 22LV505/
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture Preference”. : Select ENTER:Set
[0-4]:Select
22LV506.
Theater Wide3 picture size (for letter box programs
Picture
Picture Setting >>
3 Press ϳ or ϴ to select the item you want to
adjust. Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the setting.
Note:
• Selectable picture sizes may vary depending on the
with subtitles)
To fill the width of the screen, it is extended horizontally.
However; it is only slightly extended at the top and the
Picture Setting bottom.
Picture Preference Sports input source or broadcast signal.
Picture Size >> Brightness 25 • Picture Size menu also can be displayed by pressing
Film Mode On Contrast 50
The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden.
PC Setting >> Sharpness 25
PIC SIZE on the remote control.
DNR On Color 25
: Select : Adjust
Tint
Color Temperature
: Select
0
: Adjust
Cool
ENTER:Set
screen.
Natural picture size

3 Press ϵ or ϶ to select a mode you want to
adjust. ϵ
Brightness decrease increase
϶
In some cases, this image will display the size of
standard 4:3 with a black side bar.
ABCDEFG----------------
Note:
ABCDEFG--------------------------
• To select this picture size on 22LV505/22LV506,

Picture
brightness brightness select “Theater Wide2”.
Picture Setting >>
Contrast decrease increase Full picture size (for 16:9 source programs)
Picture Preference Standard
Picture Size >>
contrast contrast Full will display the picture at the maximum size.
Film Mode On Sharpness makes picture makes picture
PC Setting >>
softer clearer
DNR On
Color be pale color be brilliant color
: Select : Adjust Tint be reddish color be greenish
Theater Wide1 picture size (for 4:3 format
color
Mode Picture Quality programs)
Color Temperature Picture Quality To fill the screen, the right and left edges are extended,
Sports Bright and dynamic picture (factory-set) however; the center of the picture remains near its Note:
Cool Bluish • Some High Definition and/or Digital broadcasts may
Standard Standard picture quality (factory-set) former ratio.
Standard Neutral The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden. not allow you to change the picture size.
Movie Movie-like picture setting (factory-set) • 19LV505/19LV506: In 720p or 1080i signal, only the
Warm Reddish
Memory Your personal preferences (set by Theater Wide2 and Full picture size features are
you; see “Picture settings” at right). available.
4 After your desired setting, press EXIT/
CANCEL to return to the normal screen.
• 22LV505/22LV506: In 720p or 1080i signal, picture
size feature will not work.
4 After your desired setting, press EXIT/
CANCEL to return to the normal screen. Note:
• The Contrast default setting is set to maximum at the
• In PC Mode, only the Natural and Full picture size
features are available. Additionally this feature will not
work when display mode is WXGA.
factory.
36 37
TV operation
Film Mode/DNR Picture control adjustment in the PC mode

A smoother motion may be obtained by setting the Film Mode to “On” when 4
You can adjust to optimize the performance of the TV/DVD in the PC mode.
you view a DVD.
INPUT
DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) can reduce the roughness of the picture.
(This function is available only for analog broadcast.)
ENTER ENTER
/ / / / / /
MENU MENU
Film Mode DNR Picture control adjustment in the PC mode

1 Press MENU in the TV mode. Then press ϳ or
ϴ to select “Picture”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
1 Press INPUT, then press ϳ/ϴ or 4 to select
the PC mode. 5 Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the setting.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Picture 2 Press MENU. Then press ϳ or ϴ to select
TV operation
Picture Audio
Audio Channel Main Menu
Channel Lock
Picture
Lock Setup Hor Position: To adjust the horizontal position of
Audio
Setup the image on the PC mode.
: Select ENTER:Set Channel
: Select ENTER:Set Lock Ver Position: To adjust the vertical position of
Setup the image on the PC mode.
: Select ENTER:Set
Clock: To minimize any vertical bars
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Film Mode”.

2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “DNR”.
Phase:
or stripes visible on the screen
background.
This must be adjusted after the
Picture frequency of the PC mode has
Picture
Picture Setting
Picture Preference
>>
Sports
Picture Setting
Picture Preference
Picture Size
>>
Sports
>>
3 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “PC Setting”, then
press ϶ or ENTER. been set to 60Hz to optimize
picture quality (page 20).
Picture Size >> Film Mode On Picture
Film Mode
PC Setting
DNR
On
>>
On
PC Setting
DNR
>>
On
Picture Setting
Picture Preference
Picture Size
>>
Memory
>>
6 After adjusting, press ENTER to return to the
PC Setting menu. Then continue to adjust the
other items.
: Select : Adjust Film Mode Off
: Select : Adjust PC Setting >>
DNR Off
3 Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”.

3 Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”.
: Select ENTER:Set
Picture
Picture Setting >>
Picture
Picture Setting
Picture Preference
>>
Sports
4 Press ϳ or ϴ to select the desired item you
want to adjust. 7 Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.
Picture Preference Sports Picture Size >>

Picture Size >> Film Mode On PC Setting
Film Mode Off PC Setting >>
Hor Position 25
PC Setting >> DNR Off
Ver Position 25
DNR On
Clock 0
: Select : Adjust
Phase 25
: Select : Adjust

screen. : Select : Adjust ENTER:Set
Note:
• A smoother motion may be obtained by setting the Film
Mode to “On” when you view a DVD from the DVD player
connected with ColorStream (component video) inputs.
38 39
TV operation
Sound control adjustment/ Selecting the audio language/ 0-6

Selecting Stereo/Second Audio Program (SAP) Selecting the HDMI audio input source
The multi-channel TV sound (MTS) feature provides high-fidelity stereo sound. DISPLAY When two or more audio languages are included in a digital signal, you can
MTS also can transmit a second audio program (SAP) containing a second select one of the audio language. (This function is available only for digital
language or other audio information. ENTER broadcast.) ENTER
When the TV/DVD receives a stereo or SAP broadcast, the word “Stereo” or
/ / / / / /
“SAP” displays on-screen every time you press DISPLAY. When you use PC AUDIO IN jacks with HDMI or DVI device, you must select
EXIT/CANCEL HDMI audio input source from “HDMI” or “DVI”. EXIT/CANCEL
MENU MENU
Sound control adjustment Selecting Stereo/Second Selecting the audio language Selecting the HDMI audio input
Audio Program (SAP) source

1 Press MENU in the TV mode. Then press ϳ or
ϴ to select “Audio” , then press ϶ or ENTER.
“Audio” , then press ϶ or ENTER.
Main Menu
select “Audio”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
Main Menu
“Audio” , then press ϶ or ENTER.
TV operation
Main Menu Picture
Picture
Main Menu
Audio Picture Audio
Channel Channel Picture

Audio
Lock Lock Audio
Channel
Setup Setup Channel
Lock
Lock
Setup : Select ENTER:Set
: Select ENTER:Set
Setup
: Select ENTER:Set
: Select ENTER:Set
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select the item you want to

adjust. Then press ϵ or ϶ to adjust each
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “MTS”, then press ϵ or 2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Audio Language”,
then press ϶ or ENTER to display the Audio
setting.
Audio
϶ to select “Stereo”. Language menu.
Audio
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “HDMI Audio”. Then
press ϵ or ϶ to select “HDMI” or “DVI”.
Bass
Audio Audio
15 Bass 15
Treble 15 Bass 15 Treble 15 Bass 15
Balance 0 Treble 15 Balance 0 Treble 15
MTS Stereo Balance 0
MTS Stereo Balance 0
Audio Language English MTS Stereo
Audio Language English MTS Stereo
HDMI Audio HDMI Audio Language English
HDMI Audio HDMI Audio Language No Info.
HDMI Audio HDMI
HDMI Audio HDMI
: Select : Adjust
: Select ENTER:Set
: Select : Adjust
: Select : Adjust
Bass:
Treble:
Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the bass sound.
Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the treble
sound.
screen. 3 Press ϳ/ϴ or Number buttons (0-6) to select
your desired language. HDMI: When you connect the HDMI device to
the TV, select this setting.
Audio Language DVI: When you connect the DVI device to the
Balance: Press ϵ or ϶ to obtain an equal sound
level from both speakers. 0. English TV with analog audio cords, select this
1. Language 1 setting.
Note: 2. Language 2
3. French
3 After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL

to return to the normal screen.
• Generally you can leave your TV in stereo mode
because the TV automatically outputs the type of
sound being broadcast (stereo or mono).
4. Language 3
5. Spanish
6. No Info
screen.
• If the stereo sound is noisy, select “Mono” to reduce [0-6]: Select

the noise.
To listen to a second audio program (SAP)
Press ϵ or ϶ to select “SAP” in step 2 above. The TV
speakers will output the second audio program instead
of normal audio.
40 41
TV operation
Using the aspect feature/ Setting the Auto Shut Off/

Adjusting the back lighting Resetting your settings
When the Aspect feature is set to On and the TV receives a 480i signal, the If the Auto Shut Off feature is On, a station being viewed stops broadcasting
picture size is automatically selected (as described in the following table). and the TV is not operated, the TV will automatically shut itself off after 15
minutes.
ENTER ENTER
The Backlight feature adjusts the screen brightness for improved picture
clarity. / / / The Reset function returns your settings to the factory settings. / / /
MENU MENU
Using the aspect feature Adjusting the back lighting Setting the Auto Shut Off Resetting your settings

“Setup” , then press ϶ or ENTER.
Main Menu Main Menu

Main Menu Main Menu
TV operation
Picture Picture
Picture Picture
Audio Audio
Audio Audio
Channel Channel
Channel Channel
Lock Lock
Lock Lock
Setup Setup
Setup Setup
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Aspect”.

Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”.
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Backlight”.
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Auto Shut Off”.
Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”. 2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Reset”.
Setup
Setup Setup Closed Caption >>
Setup
Closed Caption >> Language English
Closed Caption >>
Language English Closed Caption >> Video Label >>
Language English
Video Label >> Language English Backlight 16
Video Label >>
Backlight 16 Video Label >> Auto Shut Off Off
Backlight 16
Auto Shut Off Off Backlight 16 Aspect On
Aspect On Auto Shut Off Off
Auto Shut Off Off Reset >>
Reset >> Aspect On
Aspect On : Select ENTER:Set
Reset >>
: Select ENTER:Set Reset >>
: Select ENTER:Set
: Select ENTER:Set
3 After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL 3 Press ϶ or ENTER to return your settings to
the factory settings.
3 Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the setting.
Setup
Closed Caption >>
Language English
Video Label >>
Aspect ratio of signal Automatic aspect size
source
4:3 Normal
(When Aspect is On)
Natural
Backlight
Auto Shut Off
Aspect
Reset
8
Off
On
>>
4 “Reset” will appear on the screen approx. 3
seconds, then it returns to the normal
: Select ENTER:Set Note:

16:9 Full Full
• The Reset function returns your adjustments to the
4:3 Letter box Theater Wide2 following factory settings:
Not defined User-set mode 4 After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL
to return to the normal screen. Picture Setting
Brightness ...... center (25)
PC Setting
Hor Position ... center (25)
Contrast ............ max (50) Ver Position.... center (25)
Sharpness...... center (25) Clock ................ center (0)
Color .............. center (25) Phase............. center (25)
Tint ................... center (0) Bass................... center (15)
Color Temperature ... Cool Treble ................ center (15)
Picture Preference .... Sports Balance................ center (0)
Film Mode .......................On
42 43
Basic playback
TV/DVD EJECT
Playing a disc EJECT
POWER POWER
This section shows you the basics on how to play a disc. To obtain a higher quality picture
VOLUME +/–
Occasionally, some picture noise may appear on the TV screen while playing a
VOL +/– DVD video disc because the high resolution pictures on these discs include a
PLAY
lot of information. In such case, you may reduce the Sharpness with the Picture
CAUTION STOP ENTER Setting menu (see page 36).
Keep your fingers well clear of the disc slot when disc is
loading or unloading. Neglecting to do so may cause serious / / / About DVD VCD CD
personal injury. The DVD VCD CD icons on the heading bar show the playable discs for the
POWER PLAY function described under that heading. PLAY
STOP : You can use this function with DVD video discs. STOP
DVD VCD : You can use this function with Video CDs. PAUSE
VCD
CD
Basic playback CD : You can use this function with Audio CDs and CD-R/RW CDs.
Preparations: DVD
• When connecting to other equipment, turn the power off. VCD
CD
Basic playback (continued)
1 Press POWER on the unit or on the remote con-

trol to turn on the unit.
• POWER indicator on the front of the unit changes
4 On the TV screen, “ ” changes to “Reading” and
then playback commences.
Reading
To pause playback (still mode)
Press PAUSE during playback.
To remove the disc
Press EJECT.
green. It may take approx. 10 seconds for a picture To resume normal playback, Remove the disc after the disc comes
to appear on screen. press PLAY. out.
• Every time you press POWER, the TV/DVD starts
from TV mode. • The sound is muted during still
Basic playback
• When using an amplifier, switch on the amplifier. mode.
A menu screen will appear on the TV screen if the

disc has a menu feature.
To stop playback
Press / or / on the remote control to Press STOP.
select title, then press ENTER. Title is selected and
2
Press TV/DVD on the remote control to select DVD
mode. play commences.
The DVD startup screen will appear on the TV screen.
5
Press VOLUME + or – to adjust the volume.
Note:
• If a non-compatible disc is loaded, “Incorrect Disc”, “Region Code Error” or “Parental Error” will appear on the TV screen
Volume : 25
according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check your disc again (see pages 7 and 64).
• Some discs may take a minute or so to start playback.
• When you set a single-faced disc label downwards (ie. the wrong way up), “Reading” will appear on the display for a few
minutes and then “Incorrect Disc” will continue to be displayed.
• Some discs may not work the resuming facility.
• Resuming cannot function when you play a PBC-featured Video CD while the PBC is on. To turn off the PBC, see page 53.
• Some playback operations of DVDs may be intentionally fixed by software producers. Since this unit plays DVDs according
3 Load a disc in the disc slot.
6 Press STOP to end playback.

to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also refer to the
instructions supplied with the DVDs.
• Do not move the unit during playback. Doing so may damage the disc.
QResuming facility
• Use the EJECT to unload and eject the disc.
• The unit records the stopped
• Do not put any objects other than discs on the disc slot. Doing so may cause the unit to malfunctions.
point, depending on the disc.
• In many instances, a menu screen will appear after playback of a movie is completed. Prolonged display of an on-screen
“ ” appears on the screen.
menu may damage your television set, permanently etching that image onto its screen. To avoid this, be sure to press
Press PLAY to resume playback
POWER on the remote control once the movie is completed.
(from the scene point).
• There may be a slight delay between the button is pressed and the function activates.
• If you press STOP again
• Load the disc in the disc slot with the label side fac- (“Q” appears on the TV screen.),
ing forward. (If the disc has a label.) Hold the disc the unit will clear the stopped
without touching either of its surfaces, align it with point.
the guides, and place it in position.
• If a disc is inserted during some modes other than Q To start playback in the stop mode
DVD mode, it may switch to DVD mode and then Press PLAY.
playback may be begun automatically.
Note:
If the unit does not operate properly:
Static electricity, etc., may affect the TV/DVD·s operation. In such
case, disconnect the AC cord, then connect it again.
44 45
Basic playback
Playing a disc (Continued) Zooming/Locating desired scene

This unit will allow you to zoom in on the frame image. You can then make 0–9
selections by switching the position of the frame.
PAUSE JUMP
PLAY Use the title, chapter and time recorded on the DVD disc to locate the DISPLAY
SKIP / desired point to playback. In the case of VCD/Audio CD discs, time and ZOOM
REV / FF track are used to locate the desired point to playback.
SLOW / To check the title/track, chapter/track and time, press DISPLAY. / / /
ENTER
EXIT/CANCEL
DVD DVD DVD
VCD
CD
Playing in fast reverse or fast forward directions VCD
CD
Zooming VCD
CD
Locating desired scene
To resume normal playback
Press REV or FF during playback.
REV: Fast reverse playback

Press PLAY.
1 Press ZOOM during playback.
The center part of the image will be

1 Press JUMP during playback or resume stop mode.
Jump
FF: Fast forward playback zoomed in.
Title
Note: Each press of ZOOM will change
Chapter
Each time you press REV or FF • The TV/DVD mutes sound during reverse and forward scan the ZOOM 1 (x 1.3), 2 (x 1.5) Time
button, the playback speed changes. of DVD/VCD/Audio CD discs. and 3 (x 2.0).
• The playback speed may differ depending on the disc.
DVD
VCD Playing frame by frame
• You can use fast reverse/fast forward playback for DivX® CD. 1
2 Press or
ter” or “Time”.
to select the “Title/Track”, “Chap-
Jump
Title
Advanced playback
Press PAUSE during still playback. Chapter
Press PLAY. Time
Each time you press PAUSE, the
picture advances one frame.
Note:
• The sound is muted during frame by frame playback.
2 Press
frame.
/ / / to view a different part of the
• You can use frame by frame playback for DivX® CD. You may move the frame from
the center position to UP, DOWN, 3 Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the number.
Jump
DVD LEFT or RIGHT direction.
VCD Playing in slow-motion Title
Chapter 12
Press SLOW (REVERSE) or (FORWARD) To resume normal playback Time
during playback. Press PLAY.
Each time you press the button, the

slow-motion speed changes. Note:
3 In the zoom mode, press ZOOM repeatedly to
return to a 1:1 view ( Off).
• If you input a wrong number, press
EXIT/CANCEL.
• Refer to the package supplied with
• The sound is muted during slow-motion playback. the disc to check the numbers.
• The Video CD cannot play Reverse Slow.
DVD
VCD
CD
Locating a chapter or track Note:
• You can select the Pause, Slow or Search playback in the
4 Press ENTER. Playback starts.
• When you change the title,

playback starts from Chapter 1 of
Press SKIP or repeatedly to display the chapter or track number you want. zoom mode. the selected title.
Playback starts from the selected chapter or track. • Some discs may not respond to zoom feature. • Some discs may not work in the
• Zoom function can be used for DivX® CD. above operation.
Playback starts from the beginning of
To locate succeeding chapters or tracks. the current chapter or track. Note:
When you press twice in quick successions, • In case of the Audio CD and Video-CD, only Track and Time
playback starts from the beginning of can be selected.
the preceding chapter or track. • In case of the Video-CD playback with PBC, the JUMP does
not work. To turn off PBC, see page 53 .
Note: • Only Time search function can be used for DivX® CD.
• A “Prohibition” symbol “” may appear at the upper right of the screen. This symbol means either the feature you tried is not
available on the disc, or the TV/DVD cannot access the feature at this time. This does not indicate a problem with the
TV/DVD.
46 47
Advanced playback
Marking desired scenes Repeat playback/A-B Repeat playback PLAY MODE

The unit stores the points that you want to watch again up to 3 points.
You can resume playback from each scene.
ENTER
ENTER
PLAY
/
SKIP /
EXIT/CANCEL
REPEAT A-B
MARKER
DVD
DVD
VCD Marking the scenes DVD
VCD Returning to the scenes DVD
VCD Repeat playback VCD
CD
A-B Repeat playback
A-B repeat playback allows you to repeat a section between
1 Press MARKER during playback.

1 Press MARKER during playback or stop mode.
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop
mode.
two selected points.
Press REPEAT A-B during playback.

1 The start point is selected.
A
2 Select the blank Marker using or .

Then press ENTER to mark the desired scene.
2 Press or to select the Marker 1-3.
2 [DVD]
Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Chapter”
or “Title”.
• Repeat this procedure to mark the The unit automatically starts
other 2 scenes. repeat playback after finishing
the current title or chapter.
Advanced playback
Play Mode
Repeat : Off
2 Press REPEAT A-B again.
The end point is selected. Playback

starts at the point that you selected.
Playback stops at the end point and
3 Press MARKER to clear the display. 3 Press ENTER.
Playback starts from the marked

[Video CD]
Press to select “Repeat”.
Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Track” or
returns to Point A automatically, then
starts again.
“All”.
scene. A B
The unit automatically starts
repeat playback after finishing
Note: Q To cancel the Marker the current track.
• Some discs may not work with the marking operation. Follow the above steps 1~2, then press EXIT/CANCEL.
• The marking is cancelled when you eject the disc or turn the Play Mode
power off. Mode : Off
• Some subtitles recorded around the marker may fail to Repeat : Off
appear.
• In case of Video CD with PBC, Marker function is prohibited.
• If you set the repeat mode during stop mode, Press REPEAT A-B again.
press PLAY to start Repeat playback.
“ Off ” appears on the screen.
3 Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.

Note:
• In A-B Repeat mode, subtitles near the A or B locations
may not be displayed.
• You cannot set the A-B Repeat for the scenes that include
To resume normal playback multiple angles.
Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2. • A-B Repeat playback does not work when Repeat playback
is activated.
Note: • You may not be able to set A-B Repeat during certain
• Some discs may not work with the repeat operation. scenes of the DVD.
• In case of Video CD with PBC, Repeat function is • A-B Repeat does not work with an interactive DVD and
prohibited during playback.
MP3/WMA/JPEG CD.
• Chapter/Track repeat function is canceled whenever SKIP
or is pressed. • In case of Video CD with PBC, A-B Repeat is prohibited.
48 49
Advanced playback
Program playback/Random playback Changing angles/Title selection/DVD menu

You can arrange the playback order of tracks on the disc. And the 0–9
unit can also select tracks at random and playback them. These DVD MENU
features work for Video CD. / / /
PLAY MODE ENTER
For Audio CD and MP3/WMA CD, please see “Random playback
ENTER PLAY
(Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®)” 58 and “Program playback
(Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®)” 59 . / / / ANGLE
EXIT/CANCEL
PLAY TOP MENU
VCD
VCD Program playback Changing angles
When playing back a disc recorded with multi-angle facility, you can change the angle that you are viewing the scene from.
1
Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.
Mode
Play Mode
: Off 1 –––
4 Press / to return to the left column, then
press / to select the “Program Playback”
and press ENTER.
1 Press ANGLE during playback.
The current angle will appear. 2 Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle
is selected.
Repeat : Off 2 –––
Program Playback 3 ––– The programs you selected will start to playback in order. 1/2
• To resume normal playback,
2 Press or to select “Mode”, then press

ENTER repeatedly to select “Program”.
select Mode: “Off” in step 2.
Note:
• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the
Play Mode angle even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.
Play Mode
Mode : Program 1 9
Mode : Program 1 ––– Repeat : Off 2 3
Program Playback 3 11
Program Playback 3 –––
Advanced playback
Title selection
Two or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title.
3 Press / to select the programming position.

Press / and then use Number buttons (0–9)
to input the track.
Q To change the program
1. Select Mode to “Program” (as step 2), press / / /
to select the track number you want to change, then 1 Press TOP MENU during playback.
Title menu appears on the screen. 3 Press ENTER or PLAY.
The playback of the selected title will
press EXIT/CANCEL.
2. Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the new track start.
• To program others, repeat this step. number.
• If you input a wrong number, press
EXIT/CANCEL.
Q To clear the program one by one
Select Mode to “Program”, press / / / to select the
track number. Then press EXIT/CANCEL.
2 Press / / / to select the desired title.
Q To clear all the programs

Play Mode At the left column, press / to select “Clear Program”. Note:
Mode : Program 1 9 Then press ENTER. • Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to select the title.
Repeat : Off 2 ––– Note: • Depending on the DVD, a “title menu” may simply be called a
3 –––
Program Playback • In playing back the Video CD with PBC, you cannot set “menu” or “title” in the instructions supplied with the disc.
Program playback.
• The program is cancelled when you eject the disc or turn the
power off. DVD menu
Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using the menu.
CD
VCD Random playback When you playback these DVDs, you can select the subtitle language, soundtrack language, etc, using the menu.
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop

mode.
3 Press PLAY.
The Random Playback will start.

1 Press DVD MENU during playback.
The DVD menu appears on the TV
screen.
3 Press ENTER.
The menu continues to another
screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set
• Press DVD MENU again to resume the item completely.
• If you set “Random” during playback mode, playback at the scene when you
pressed DVD MENU.
2 Press / to select “Mode”, then press
ENTER repeatedly to select “Random”.
Random playback will begin after the track that is
currently being played has ended. Note:
Mode
Play Mode
: Random
• To resume normal playback,
select Mode: “Off” in step 2. 2 Press / / / to select the desired item. • Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to resume
playback from the scene point when you press DVD MENU.
1 –––
Repeat : Off 2 ––– Note:
Program Playback 3 –––
• In case of Video CD with PBC, you cannot set Random
function during playback.
• The random playback is cancelled when you eject the disc or
turn the power off.
50 51
Advanced playback
Changing soundtrack language/Subtitles AUDIO SELECT

Disc status/To turn off the PBC
SUBTITLE
DISPLAY
PLAY MODE
/
ENTER
DVD
VCD Changing soundtrack language Subtitles
DVD
VCD Disc status VCD To turn off the PBC (see page 8)
You can select the language when you play a multilingual disc. When playing back a disc recorded with subtitles, you can With press of DISPLAY, the status of the disc Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.
select the subtitle language or turn the subtitle off. will appear on the screen.
To cancel the display, press DISPLAY again.
1
1 Press AUDIO SELECT during playback.
The current soundtrack language will 1 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during playback until
the desired language is selected.
Press / to select “Mode”, then press
appear.
1/2 Eng Dolby Digital
1/5 Eng
DVD
ELAPSED TOTAL
2 ENTER repeatedly until “Off” appear.
Play Mode
DISC OPERATION TIME TIME Mode : Off 1 –––
2
3 –––
To turn off the subtitle, press SUBTITLE until Program Playback
2 Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly until the

desired language is selected.
“Off” appears.
Off
TITLE NO. DVD
Title 1/3
1/1 Eng Dolby Digital
00:15:25 01:41:39
Chapter 2/24
1/2 Eng
CHAPTER
Advanced playback
NO.
1/1
2/2 Fre Dolby Digital Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.
ANGLE NO. SUBTITLE LANGUAGE 3

• The on screen display will disappear after a
AUDIO LANGUAGE A KIND OF AUDIO
• The on screen display will disappear after a few few seconds.
seconds. Q To turn on the PBC
Note:
• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change Follow the above steps 1~2, then press ENTER repeatedly
In case of Video CD playback subtitles, or to turn subtitles on or off. until “PBC” appear.
• While playing a DVD, the subtitle may change when Video CD
Audio type changes as follows each time you press AUDIO you loaded or eject the disc. ELAPSED TOTAL
SELECT. • In some cases, a selected subtitle language may not DISC OPERATION TIME TIME
LR L R
be changed immediately.
VCD 00:08:32 00:51:03

Track 3/15
Note:
• If the desired language is not heard after pressing the
button several times, the language is not recorded on
the disc. TRACK NO.
• The selected soundtrack language is cancelled when
you eject the disc. The initial default language or
available language will be heard if the disc is played
back again.
• If you select DTS in playing DTS-encoded disc, no
sound will be heard from the TV/DVD·s speakers.
52 53
Advanced playback
MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation

This unit can playback the MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®-data which has been recorded on CD-R or CD-RW. To produce / / /
the MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®-data, you need a Windows-PC with CD-RW drive and a MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®-encoding ENTER
Software (not supplied). The Apple-HFS-System cannot be played. STOP
PLAY
This player requires discs/recordings to meet certain technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback quality.
There are many different types of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing MP3/WMA files). Not all recordable RETURN
discs will produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria set forth in this owner·s manual are meant only as a
guide. Use of CD-RW for MP3 files is not recommended.
You must obtain any required permission from copyright owners to download or use copyrighted content. CD MP3/WMA and Audio CD playback
Toshiba cannot and does not grant such permission.
CD Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD information 1 Load an Audio CD or a disc on which MP3

or WMA files have been recorded in the disc
slot.
About file menu
Limitations on MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD playback

• MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD is the disc that is standardized by ISO9660, its file name must include 3-digits extension
letters, “.mp3”, “.wma”, “.jpg”, “.div”, “.divx”, “.avi”.
• MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD must be correspond to the ISO standardized files.
2 A file browser screen will appear on the screen.
Folder-1 Select Files

3/15 00:00:00
/WMA-11.WMA
MP3-5 Select Files

Folder-2 Repeat :Off MP3-6 Repeat :Off
• This unit can read 2000 files per disc. If one disc has more than 2000 files, it reads up to 2000 files, the remaining files MP3-1
MP3-2
Mode :Off
WMA-11 Mode :Off
will be omitted. MP3-3 WMA-12
WMA-1
• MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CDs cannot be used for the purpose of recording. WMA-2
JPEG Preview Picture-1
WMA-3 Picture-2
• If the CD has both audio tracks and MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files, only audio tracks will be played. Music Playing
Movie-1
• It may take more than one minute for this unit to read MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files depending on its structure.
3 Press / to select file. Movie-2

• Music recorded by “Joliet Recording Specification” can be played back, the file name is displayed (within 15 letters) on
the screen. Long file names will be condensed.
/MP3-2.MP3
• The music files recorded by “Hierarchical File System” (HFS) cannot be played.
Advanced playback
Folder-2 Repeat :Off
MP3-1 Mode :Off
Limitations on display MP3-2
MP3-3
• The maximum number for display is 15 letters. WMA-1
JPEG Preview
Available letters for display are the following: WMA-2
WMA-3
capital or small alphabets of A through Z, numbers of 0 through 9, and _ (under score).

• Other letters than those above are replaced in hyphen.
• In case the current directory includes more than 8 Note:
files, press or to scroll in the file list. • In the case of a CD containing a mixture of MP3, WMA,
Notes on MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files
JPEG and DivX® files, the files are played back by
To playback MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CD in the recorded order, • To see contents in folder, select the folder and then
selecting them from the file browser.
1. Use MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® software that records data alphabetically or numerically. press ENTER. To return to the parent directory, press
• MP3 or WMA file on the Kodak Picture CD is not
2. Name each file including two-digit or three-digit number (ex. “01” “02” or “001” “002”). RETURN or select “ Go Up ...” then press ENTER. recognized on this unit.
3. Refrain from making too many sub-folders. • When PLAY is pressed after the file browser
displayed, playback begins automatically starting
CAUTION: from the first file. In this case, if the first file is an
MP3/WMA file, only MP3/WMA files are played back Note:
• Some MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® CDs cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions.
• During MP3/WMA playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B
• The CD-R/RW that has no music data or non MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files cannot be played back. in order. If the first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG
Repeat functions.
file is played back. If the first file is a DivX® file, the
• You can use Repeat (Track or All), Random functions and
Standard, sampling frequency and the bit rate: first DivX® file is played back. If there is no file at a Program playback for Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX ®
MP3 CD root directory, playback does not begin automatically. playback 58 59 .
MPEG-1 Audio
32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz
32kbps ~ 320kbps (constant bit rate or variable bit rate)
The recommend recording setting for a high-quality sound is 44.1kHz of sampling frequency and 128kbps of constant
4 Press ENTER.
The selected file starts playing back.
QSelect Files
The file type to make it display in the file browser can
be chosen.
bit rate.
WMA CD 1.Press or to highlight “Select Files” at right column
WMA version 7 and 8 in the file browser.
32kHz/48kbps, 44.1kHz/48kbps~192kbps, 48kHz/128kbps~192kbps 2. Press ENTER, then press or to select file type
The file recorded by mono, 48kHz, 48 kbps is not available to this unit. Press STOP to end playback. from the list (Music, Picture or Movie).
DivX® video
DivX® version: DivX® 3, 4, 5, and 6 (specifically 3.1.1, 4.1.2, 5.0.2, 5.0.5, 5.1.1, 5.2.1, 6.0 at Home Theater profile).
Audio format: MPEG1 Layer2 (MP2), MPEG1 Layer3 (MP3)
5 3. Press ENTER to add/remove check mark. Checked
file type will be displayed in the file browser.
4. Press RETURN to save the setting.
Sampling frequencies: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz
Bit rate: 32kbps ~ 320kbps • The unit records the stopped point. “ ” appears
Resolution: Max 720 x 576 (at 25fps), Max 720 x 480 (at 30fps) on the TV screen. Press PLAY to resume playback
(from the scene point).
Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
• If you press STOP again or unload the disc, the unit
United States and/or other countries.
will clear the stopped point.
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.
54 55
Advanced
Advanced playback
playback
ZOOM
MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD DVD MENU
ENTER
operation (Continued) / / /
PAUSE
STOP ENTER
PLAY /
SKIP STOP
ANGLE PLAY
TOP MENU
CD JPEG playback CD Slide show playback CD DivX® playback CD Playing DivX® VOD content
The slide show enables you to view pictures (files) one after ®
DivX VOD content is protected by DRM (Digital Rights
1 Load a JPEG disc in the disc slot.
another automatically.
Preparation:
1 Load a disc on which DivX® files have been
recorded in the disc slot. Management) system. This restricts playback of content
to specific registered devices.
A file browser screen will appear on the TV
2 A file browser screen

will appear on the
screen.
/Picture-01.JPG
Picture-01
Picture-02
Select Files
Repeat :Off
• Set “JPEG Interval” setting to “5 Seconds”, “10 Seconds”
or “15 Seconds” 63 . 2 screen.
/Movie-01.DIVX
If the incorrect DRM file
is loaded, “Authorization
Picture-03 Mode :Off
Error This player is not View DivX® VOD Rental
1 Select your desired starting file for the slide Movie-01 Select Files
Picture-04
Picture-05 Movie-02 Repeat :Off This rental has 5 views left.
Picture-06
JPEG Preview show in the step 3 on left. Movie-03 Mode :Off authorized to play this Do you want to use one
Picture-07 Movie-04
Picture-08 W: 2048 H: 1536 Movie-05 video.” will appear on the of your 5 views now?
Movie-06
JPEG Preview screen.
2 Press ENTER or PLAY to start slide show from Movie-07

Yes No
When you attempt to play
3 Press / to select the file. Movie-08
the selected file. ®
To display a thumbnail list, press DVD MENU. DivX VOD, the number
of plays is limited and the
Press / / / to select the desired file.
(To return to the file browser, press TOP MENU.) 3 Press / to select file.
right message will appear on the screen. If you wish to
Advanced playback
play it, select “Yes”.
• If the number of plays goes over the limit, then “Rental

• If you press PAUSE during the slide show, the slide
Expired” will be displayed. In this case, the file will not
show stops temporary. “\\” appears briefly on the TV
be played.
screen.
Press PLAY or SKIP again to resume the slide show.
• If the picture appears upside down or sideways, press Note:
• When PLAY is pressed after the file browser ANGLE repeatedly until it·s right side up. • When PLAY has been pressed after the • In order to play DivX® VOD content on this unit, you first
displayed, playback begins automatically file browser displayed, playback begins need to register the unit with registration code. See page
starting from the first file. In this case, if the “ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the TV screen. automatically starting from the first file. In this 64 .
first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is • When the slide show playback finished, the file list case, if the first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG • Depending on the recording conditions of DivX® file, you
played back. If the first file is a DivX® file, the appears. file is played back. If the first file is a DivX® may not be able to use FF, REV or JUMP function.
first DivX® file is played back. If the first file • To stop the slide show, press STOP. The file browser file, the first DivX® file is played back. If the
is an MP3/WMA file, only MP3/WMA files appears. first file is an MP3/WMA file, only MP3/WMA
are played back in order. If there is no file file are played back in order. If there is no file
at a root directory, playback does not begin at a root directory, playback does not begin
Note:
automatically. automatically.
• During JPEG playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B
Repeat functions.
4 Press ENTER or PLAY. The selected picture

appears on the screen.
• When an image exceeds 5760 x 3840 pixels, the entire
image may not be displayed on a screen, preview window
or thumbnail list.
4 Press ENTER or PLAY. The selected DivX®
movie will be played back on the TV screen.
• It may have a longer interval due to the size of data.
Rotating an image
You can rotate an image by 90 degrees.
Press ANGLE during playback of the image.
“ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the screen.
Press STOP to end playback.
Zooming an image
Zoom function also can be used in viewing JPEG
files. Press ZOOM (See “Zooming” 47 ).
5 • The unit records the stopped
point. “ ” appears on the TV
screen. Press PLAY to resume
playback (from the scene
5 Press STOP to end playback.
The file browser appears on the
screen. If you want to watch the
point).
• If you press STOP again or un
load the disc, the unit will clear
other file, repeat steps 3 ~ 4. the stopped point. To want to
watch the other file, repeat steps
3 ~ 4.
56 57
Advanced playback
Repeat, random and program playback

using file browser
/ / /
ENTER / / /
PLAY ENTER
SKIP / PLAY
®
CD Repeat playback (Audio CD/ CD Random playback (Audio CD/ CD Program playback (Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX )
MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®) MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®)
1
Press / to select “Program View”, then press
In the file browser, press / / /
“Edit Mode”, then press ENTER.
to select
4 ENTER. Program View shows only the
1 In the file browser, press / /

“Repeat” during stop mode.
/ to select
1 In the file browser, press /
“Mode” during stop mode.
/ / to select programmed files that you have added in step 2.
MP3-1 Edit Mode

Folder-1 Repeat :Off MP3-2 Browser View
Folder-2 Mode :Off MP3-3 Clear Program
MP3-1 Edit Mode WMA-3
Folder-1 Select Files MP3-2
Folder-2 Repeat :Off
Folder-2 Repeat :Off MP3 3
JPEG Preview
MP3-1 Mode :Off
MP3-2
MP3-1 Mode :Off When “Edit Mode” is black
MP3-2
MP3-3 color, you can mark the files Program View
MP3-3
which you want to add into
Program list.
2 Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Track” or

“All”. 2 Press ENTER to select “Random”.
Advanced playback
2 Press / / / to select file you want to

add into the program list.
Folder-1
Folder-2
MP3-1
MP3-2
Edit Mode
Program View
Add To Program
Folder-1 Select Files Folder-1 Select Files Folder-1 Repeat :Off MP3-3
Folder-2 Repeat :Track Folder-2 Repeat :Off Folder-2 Mode :Off WMA-1
JPEG Preview
MP3-1 Mode :Off MP3-1 Mode :Random MP3-1 Edit Mode WMA-2
MP3-2 MP3-2 MP3-2 WMA-3
MP3-3
Browser View
MP3 3 MP3-3
WMA-1
JPEG Preview
3 Press PLAY. WMA 2
The unit automatically starts repeat

3 Press PLAY.
The random playback will start.

Press ENTER. Selected file
was marked.
Repeat this procedure to
5
In the Program View, press PLAY. The files
start to playback in programed order that were
added by you.
playback after finishing the current
track. select the other files.
To remove file from program list in stop mode
In the Edit Mode, switch to Program View. Select file
Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.
Select Mode : “Off” in step 2.
3 Press / / / to select “Add To Program”.
Then press ENTER. All marked files are added
into the program list.
you want to remove, then press ENTER. Select “Clear
Program” and press ENTER. Marked file is removed
from program list.
Note: Note: Folder-1
• The repeat function is cancelled when you eject the disc • The random function is cancelled when you eject the disc
Edit Mode
Note:
Folder-2 Program View
or turn the power off. or turn the power off. MP3-1 Add To Program
• The program function is cancelled when you eject the disc
• Track repeat function is canceled whenever SKIP or MP3-2 or turn the power off.
is pressed. MP3-3
WMA-1
• The function of A-B Repeat can be used for DivX® CD. See JPEG Preview
WMA 2
“A-B Repeat playback” 49 .
When you finish storing the files
which you want into the Program
list, select “Edit Mode” and press
ENTER to release edit mode.
58 59
Function setup
TV/DVD
Customizing the function settings
You can change the default settings of the DVD mode to customize
performance to your preference.
Press TV/DVD on the remote control to select DVD mode.
/ / /
ENTER
SETUP
RETURN
DVD
VCD
CD
Setting procedure Setting details
Section Option Details Page

1 Press SETUP during stop mode.
The following on-screen display appears.

4
Then press or ENTER. The selectable
settings will appear.
Menu
Parental
DRC
Menu
TV Screen : 4:3
Off
English
To select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and “Audio”
Subtitle
Display
4:3
QSoundSet Password
: English
On Subtitle 62
16:9 if more than one language are available on the disc.
Parental
DRC
E.B.L.
Menu : English
Off
Output Mode : Auto
Audio
Picture English
Interlace Audio
QSound
TV
Subtitle
Screen
Set Password
: 4:3
On
English
JPEG Interval
DivX(R) :VOD
Off
Output
Display
Audio : English
Interlace
On
Picture Mode
DivX(R) :VOD
Auto To select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of
TV Screen
JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds your TV.
Screen Saver : On
62
To turn On or Off the operational status display on the TV
Display
screen.
Change the selection using or , by referring
2
Press or to select the desired section, then To select a preferred picture mode from “Video”, “Film” or
press or . 5 to the corresponding pages 61 ~ 64 .
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Picture Mode
JPEG Interval
“Auto”.
To select a preferred setting for the slide show playback.
63
Parental
DRC
Menu
TV Screen : Off
English
16:9
QSoundSet Password
Subtitle
Display : English
On
• Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 to Night Mode To select On or Off for Night Mode.
Output Mode
Audio
Picture : Auto
English
Interlace
change other option. 63
JPEG Interval
DivX(R) :VOD
Off
• To select another section, go To select a digital output sound format corresponding to
Function setup
back to step 2 by pressing Digital Out
your system connection.
repeatedly.
Parental To select a preferred parental level for the parental setting.
Password To change the password. 64

3 First option will be highlighted. Press
to select the desired option.
Parental
DRC
Menu
TV Screen : Off
English
16:9
or
6
To clear SETUP screen, press SETUP once or
press RETURN repeatedly.
DivX(R) VOD To display your 8-character registration code.
QSoundSet Password
Subtitle
Display : English
On
Output Mode
Audio
Picture : Auto
Interlace
English
JPEG Interval
DivX(R) :VOD
Off
60 61
Function setup
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Setting details Setting details (continued)
Picture Mode
Parental
DRC
E.B.L.
Menu : Off
English Parental
DRC
Menu
TV Screen : Off
English
16:9 Parental
Menu
E.B.L.
Night Mode : Off
English
QSound
TV
Subtitle
Screen
Set Password
: On
4:3
English QSoundSet Password
Subtitle
Display : English
On Subtitle
TV
Digital
Screen
Out
Set Password
: English
4:3
Bitstream
There are two types of source content in pictures
Output
Display
Audio : On
English
Interlace Output Mode
Audio
Picture : Auto
Interlace
English recorded in DVD video discs: film content (pictures Output
Audio
Display : Interlace
On
English
Picture Mode
DivX(R) :VOD
Auto JPEG Interval
DivX(R) :VOD
Off recorded from films at 24 frames per second) and Picture Mode
DivX(R) VOD
: Auto
JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds video content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds
Screen Saver : On second). Make this selection according to the type of Screen Saver : On
content being viewed.
Auto: Select this selection normally.

Menu, Subtitle, Audio TV Screen The DVD player automatically detects Ϯ Night Mode
source content, film or video of Night Mode enables you to control the dynamic range so as
You can select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and You have the following screen sizes to choose from: playback source, and converts that to achieve a suitable sound for your equipment.
“Audio” if more than one languages are recorded onto signal in an appropriate method.
Off: It plays back at the recording level on the disc.
the disc. 4:3 (Letter box):
When playing back a wide screen-DVD disc, it Film: The DVD player converts film content On: Loud sound such as explosion is toned down
English, Francais, Espanol: displays the wide picture with black bands at the pictures appropriately. Suitable for slightly when played back. This is suitable when
The selected language will be heard or seen. top and bottom of screen. playback of film content pictures. it is connected to a stereo.
Note:
Function setup
Other: • This function works only when the disc recorded with
Other language can be selected (see “Language 4:3 (Pan & scan): Video: The DVD player filters video signal and Dolby Digital is played back.
code list” 69 ). It displays the wide picture on the whole screen converts it appropriately. • The level of Night Mode may differ depending on DVD
with left and right edges automatically cut off. Suitable for playback of video content video disc.
Original (Audio): pictures.
The unit will select the first priority language of
16:9 (Wide):
each disc. Note:
A wide screen picture is displayed full size.
Off (Subtitle): • Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or
Ϯ Digital Out
Subtitles do not appear. Note: doubled. In this case, select “Video”.
• If the DVD disc is not formatted in the Pan & scan style, it You can select the digital output sound format corresponding
will display 4:3 style. JPEG Interval to your system connection.
Note: Off:
• If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the You can continuously playback all JPEG files There is no sound output from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
first-priority language is selected. jack.
automatically.
• If you want to change the OSD language, you can perform After the selection below, the disc will start playback on
Display PCM:
it by “Language” in the TV menu 22 . Change Dolby Digital to PCM for the output.
JPEG files which have been recorded.
Select when connected to a 2 channel digital stereo
On screen display can be switched on or off when you amplifier.
press any buttons. Off:
Plays back one file at a time. Bitstream:
Disc audio bitstream data will be output.
Off: On screen displays do not appear when you
press any buttons. 5 Seconds:
Note:
On: On screen displays appear when you press Plays back images in the form of a slide show at • Even if you select “Bitstream”, MPEG Audio will be output
the buttons (factory setting). 5 second intervals. in PCM format.
10 Seconds:
Plays back images in the form of a slide show at
10 second intervals.
15 Seconds:
Plays back images in the form of a slide show at
15 second intervals.
62 63
Function setup
EJECT
Customizing the function settings (Continued) Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc 0–9
Depending on the DVD disc, the disc may try to temporarily cancel the rating level
that you have set.
It is up to you to decide whether to cancel the rating level or not.
ENTER
RETURN
Setting details (continued) DVD Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc
Note:
DRC
Menu
E.B.L.
Parental
QSound
Subtitle
TV
Password
Screen
: Off
English
: Change
On
4:3
English
QSet the new password
1) Press or to select “Password”, then press

1 Load a DVD disc.
• This temporary cancellation of rating level will be kept until
the disc is ejected.
When the disc is ejected, the original rating level will be
Audio VOD
Display
DivX(R) : On
Display
English ENTER. “Enter Current Password” screen will set again automatically.
Picture Mode : Auto appear.
JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds 2) Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the current
Screen Saver : On
password (If the password has not been set yet
after you purchase this unit, it is “0000”).
3) Then press ENTER. “Enter New Password” screen
will appear. Press Number buttons (0–9) to input
the new password.
Parental control setting 4) Press ENTER. Now your new password has been
set. Be sure to remember this number!
Some discs are specified as not suitable for children. Such
discs can be limited not to playback with the unit.
1) Press or to select “Parental”, then press
If you forget the password 2 If the DVD disc has been designed to
temporarily cancel the Rating level, the screen
which follows the “Reading” screen will
ENTER. “Enter Password” screen will appear. 1) Press EJECT to remove the disc. change, depending on which disc is played.
2) Press “0000” using Number buttons (0–9). 2) While holding 7 down on the remote control and If you select “YES” with the ENTER key,
(Please note, this is pre-setting password of this then press STOP on the unit. “Password Clear” password input screen will then appear.
unit). Then press ENTER. The parental level list appears on the screen. Now the password • If “NO” is selected, press EJECT to remove
Function setup
will appear. has been returned to the initial value (“0000”). the disc.
• Level Off: The parental control setting does not
function.
• Level 8: Virtually all DVD software can be
played back.
• Level 1: DVD software for adults cannot be
QDivX® VOD 3 Enter the password with Number buttons (0–9).
Then press ENTER.
In order to play DivX® VOD (Video On Demand) content

played back. on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your To exit from the entry, press
3) Press or to select from the level 1 to level 8. DivX® VOD content provider. You do this by generating RETURN.
The limitation will be more severe as the level a DivX® VOD registration code, which you submit to
number is lower. Then press ENTER. your provider. Enter Password
Note:
• The parental control level is equivalent to the following Press or to select “DivX(R) VOD”. Then press
USA movie ratings. ENTER. Your 8-character registration code is
displayed. Make a note of the code as you will need
Level 1: G Level 5: it when you register with a DivX® VOD provider.
Level 2: Level 6: R Then press ENTER to select Done.
Level 3: PG Level 7: NC-17
Level 4: PG-13 Level 8:
Note:
The parental control levels for other countries/area • If each setup (pages 62 ~ 64 ) has completed, the unit
than U.S. are included for future use. Check the can always work under the same condition (especially with
appropriate parental control level when you buy a DVD
video disc equipped with the parental control feature
in the future.
DVD discs).
Each setup will be retained in the memory even if you turn
the power off.
4 Playback will commence if the entered
password is correct.
• Depending on the discs, the unit cannot limit playback.

• Some discs may not be encoded with specific rating
level information though its disc jacket says “adult.”
For those discs, the age restriction will not work.
• The password is required every time when you
change the parental level.
• If you input a wrong number, press EXIT/CANCEL.
64 65
Others
Understanding the Power Return feature

If the power is cut off while you are viewing the TV/DVD and the power is resupplied, the Power Return feature will
turn the TV/DVD on automatically. If the power is going to be off for a long time or you are going to be away from the
TV/DVD for a long time, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to prevent the TV/DVD from turning on in your
absence.
Troubleshooting SYMPTOMS POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS PAGE

Use the following check list for troubleshooting when you have problems with your unit. Consult your local dealer or DVD
service outlet if problems persist.
Be sure all connections are properly made when using with other units.
• No disc is loaded. 44
Playback doesn·t start. • The disc may be dirty. Clean up the disc. 7
• The unit cannot play CD-ROMs, etc. 8
SYMPTOMS POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS PAGE
No picture. • TV/DVD selector is not set correctly. 44
POWER
• Check the input selector of the amplifier is set properly. -
• Make sure the connection of AC cord is secured. No sound. • The unit is in the special playback mode. 46
TV/DVD does not operate. • Try another AC outlet. 20 • Select the correct Audio Input/Output position on AV amplifier. 18, 19
• Unplug unit, then plug it back in.
Picture is distorted during fast
TV BROADCAST RECEPTION • The picture will be distorted occasionally. -
reverse/forward playback.
• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station. 26 Stopping playback, search,
Poor sound or No sound. • Check Volume adjustments or mute. 26, 27 slowmotion play, repeat play, or
• Check for sources of possible interference. 68 • Some discs may not do some of the functions. -
program play, etc. cannot be
• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station. 26 performed.
• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna. 14, 15 No on-screen display. • Set Display to On. 62
Poor picture or No picture.
• Check for sources of possible interference. 68
The unit or remote operation key • Turn off the unit and unplug the AC power cord for several minutes,
• Check Picture setting. 36 -
is not functioning. then replug it.
• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station. 26
Poor reception on some Playback does not start when
• Station signal is weak, reorient antenna to receive weaker station. 14 • Check the Parental setup. 64
channels. the title is selected.
• Check for sources of possible interference. 68
Audio soundtrack and/or subtitle
• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station. 26
language is not changed when • Multilingual language is not recorded on the DVD disc. 52
• Make sure channels are set into memory. 23
you playback a DVD.
Poor color or no color. • Check Picture setting. 36
• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna. 14, 15 • Some discs have no subtitles.
Others
No subtitle. 52
• Check for sources of possible interference. 68 • Subtitles are cleared. Press SUBTITLE.
• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station. 26 Angle cannot be changed. • Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD disc. 51
• Make sure channels are set into memory. 23 “” appears on the screen. • The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc. 46
Picture wobbles or drifts.
• Cable TV company is scrambling signal. -
• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna. 14, 15 REMOTE CONTROL
• Check all Cable TV connections. 15 • Aim the remote control at the remote sensor.
No CATV reception. • Set Air/Cable selection to the Cable position. 23 • Operate within approx. 5 meters or reduce the light in the room.
The remote control does not
• Station or Cable TV system problems, try another station. 26 • Clear the path of the beam. 13
function.
• The batteries are weak. Replace the batteries.
Horizontal or diagonal bars on • Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna. 14, 15 • Check the batteries are inserted correctly.
screen. • Check for sources of possible interference. 68
• Make sure Air/Cable selection is in the appropriate position. 23
No reception above channel 13.
• If antenna is used, check UHF antenna connections. 14
• Auto shut off feature worked. 43
TV shuts off. • Sleep Timer is set. 27
• Power interrupted. -
• TV station experiencing problems or program tuned is not closed 26
captioned. Try another channel.
Closed - Caption is not
• Check Cable TV connection or VHF/UHF antenna, reposition or 14, 15
activated.
rotate antenna.
• Set “CC Setting” to “On” to turn on the closed caption decoder. 34
Display is not shown in your
• Select proper language in the menu options. 22
language.
66 67
Others
Reception disturbances Language code list

Most types of television interference can be remedied by adjusting the height and position of the VHF/UHF antenna. Enter the appropriate code number for the initial settings “Menu”, “Subtitle” and/or “Audio” 62 .
Outdoor antennas are recommended for best results. The most common types of television interference are shown
below. If one of these symptoms appear when the TV/DVD is connected to a Cable TV system, the disturbance may
be caused by the local Cable TV company broadcast. Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code
Abkhazian 1112 Fiji 1620 Lingala 2224 Singhalese 2919
Afar 1111 Finnish 1619 Lithuanian 2230 Slovak 2921
Afrikaans 1116 French 1628 Macedonian 2321 Slovenian 2922
IGNITION Albanian 2927 Frisian 1635 Malagasy 2317 Somali 2925

Black spots or horizontal streaks may appear, the picture may flutter or Amharic 1123 Galician 1722 Malay 2329 Spanish 1529
drift. Usually caused by interference from automobile ignition systems, Arabic 1128 Georgian 2111 Malayalam 2322 Sundanese 2931
neon lamps or AC powered tools and appliances such as drills or hair
dryers. Armenian 1835 German 1415 Maltese 2330 Swahili 2933
Assamese 1129 Greek 1522 Maori 2319 Swedish 2932
Aymara 1135 Greenlandic 2122 Marathi 2328 Tagalog 3022
Azerbaijani 1136 Guarani 1724 Moldavian 2325 Tajik 3017
Bashkir 1211 Gujarati 1731 Mongolian 2324 Tamil 3011
GHOSTS Basque 1531 Hausa 1811 Nauru 2411 Tatar 3030
Ghosts are caused by the television signal following two paths. One is Bengali; Bangla 1224 Hebrew 1933 Nepali 2415 Telugu 3015
the direct path and the other is reflected by tall buildings, hills or other
Bhutani 1436 Hindi 1819 Norwegian 2425 Thai 3018
large objects. Changing the direction or position of the antenna may
improve the reception. Bihari 1218 Hungarian 1831 Oriya 2528 Tibetan 1225
Breton 1228 Icelandic 1929 Panjabi 2611 Tigrinya 3019
Bulgarian 1217 Indonesian 1924 Pashto, Pushto 2629 Tonga 3025
Burmese 2335 Interlingua 1911 Persian 1611 Turkish 3028
Byelorussian 1215 Irish 1711 Polish 2622 Turkmen 3021
SNOW Cambodian 2123 Italian 1930 Portuguese 2630 Twi 3033
If the TV/DVD is located far from the TV station, in a fringe reception
area where the signal is weak, small dots may appear in the picture. Catalan 1311 Japanese 2011 Quechua 2731 Ukrainian 3121
If the signal is extremely weak, the installation of a larger external Chinese 3618 Javanese 2033 Rhaeto-Romance 2823 Urdu 3128
Others
antenna may be necessary. Corsican 1325 Kannada 2124 Romanian 2825 Uzbek 3136
Croatian 1828 Kashmiri 2129 Russian 2831 Vietnamese 3219
Czech 1329 Kazakh 2121 Samoan 2923 Volapük 3225
Danish 1411 Kirghiz 2135 Sanskrit 2911 Welsh 1335
Dutch 2422 Korean 2125 Scots Gaelic 1714 Wolof 3325
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE (RFI) English 1524 Kurdish 2131 Serbian 2928 Xhosa 3418
Caused by two-way radios, this type of interference produces moving
ripples or diagonal streaks in the picture. Some cases may cause a Esperanto 1525 Laothian 2225 Serbo-Croatian 2918 Yiddish 2019
loss of contrast in the picture. Changing the direction and position of Estonian 1530 Latin 2211 Shona 2924 Yoruba 3525
the antenna or installing an RFI filter may improve the picture.
Faroese 1625 Latvian, Lettish 2232 Sindhi 2914 Zulu 3631
CARE AND MAINTENANCE

To prevent fire or shock hazard, disconnect the TV/DVD from the power source before cleaning.
Use caution when cleaning or wiping the plastic parts.
68 69
Others
Specifications
Limited United States Warranty
Model 19LV505 / 19LV506 22LV505 / 22LV506 LCD TV/DVD Combination - Depot Repair Warranty
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following limited warranties to original
General consumers in the United States. THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER
Power supply AC 120V 60Hz PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION AS A GIFT FROM THE
Power consumption Operation: 60 W, Stand by: 1 W Operation: 65 W, Stand by: 1 W ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.
Weight 11.2 lbs (5.1 kg) 13.5 lbs (6.1 kg)
LCD TV/DVD COMBINATIONS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE
Width: 18-9/16 inches (472 mm) Width: 21-1/8 inches (536.5 mm)
Dimensions Height: 15-13/16 inches (401 mm) Height: 17-5/16 inches (439.5 mm) OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED
Depth: 8-1/8 inches (207 mm) Depth: 8-1/8 inches (207 mm) BY THESE WARRANTIES.
Operating temperature 5°C-40°C (41°F-104°F)
Operating humidity Less than 80% RH (No condensation)
LCD TV/DVD COMBINATIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, AND USED IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED
Television
BY THESE WARRANTIES.
LCD panel (Screen size is approximate.) 19-inch diagonal 22-inch diagonal
Display method Color TFT LCD
Number of pixels 1440 (Horizontal) x 900 (Vertical) 1680 (Horizontal) x 1050 (Vertical) Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor Your Responsibility
Television system NTSC standard, ATSC standard (8VSB), QAM TACP warrants this LCD TV/DVD Combination THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO
VHF: 2-13
and its parts against defects in materials or THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
Receiving channels UHF: 14-69 workmanship for a period of one (1) year after
CATV: 1-125 (4A, A-5~A-1, A~I, J~W, W+1~W+84) the date of original retail purchase. DURING (1) You must retain your bill of sale or provide
Antenna input VHF/UHF 75 THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP·S OPTION, other proof of purchase.
REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH
Speaker 1-3/16 x 2-13/16 inches (30.5 x 71.1 mm), 8 x 2
A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT (2) All warranty servicing of this LCD TV/DVD
Audio output power 1.5W + 1.5W CHARGE TO YOU. Combination must be made by the Depot
DVD/CD player Warranty Repair Center specified by the TACP
Signal system NTSC Rental Units Consumer Solutions Center.
The warranty for LCD TV/DVD Combination rental
1. DVD (12cm, 8cm)
Applicable disc
2. CD (12cm, 8cm) units begins on the date of the first rental or thirty (3) The warranties from TACP are effective only
(30) days after the date of shipment to the rental if the LCD TV/DVD Combination is purchased
Pickup 1-Lens, 2-Beams System
firm, whichever comes first. and operated in the Continental U.S.A. or
Others
Input/Output Puerto Rico.

(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 , negative sync., Mini DIN 4-pin x 1 Commercial Units
S-Video input
(C) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 LCD TV/DVD Combinations sold and used for (4) Labor service charges for set installation,
(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 , negative sync., pin jack x 1 commercial purposes have a limited warranty for all setup, adjustment of customer controls, and
ColorStream video input
(PB, PR) 0.7 V (p-p), 75 , pin jack x 2 parts and labor, which warranty begins on the date installation or repair of antenna systems are not
Video input 1.0 V (p-p), 75 , negative sync., pin jack x 1 of original retail purchase and ends on the date that covered by this warranty. Reception problems
is ninety (90) days thereafter. caused by inadequate antenna systems are
Audio input –8dBm, 50 k, negative sync., pin jack (L/R) x 2
your responsibility.
HDMI compliant (type A connector), HDCP compliant, E-EDID compliant Owner·s Manual and Product Registration Card
Suggested scan rates: 1080i, 480p, 720p
HDMI input
HDMI Audio: 2-channel PCM, 32/44.1/48 kHz sampling frequency, 16/20/24 bits per
Read this owner·s manual thoroughly before operating (5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials
sample this LCD TV/DVD Combination. or workmanship as limited above, and do not
PC input MONITOR: Mini-Dsub 15pin x 1, AUDIO: 3.5ø mm Stereo jack x 1
extend to any LCD TV/DVD Combination or
Complete and mail the enclosed product registration parts that have been lost or discarded by you
Digital audio output (Coaxial) 0.5 V (p-p), 75 , pin jack x 1 card or register your LCD TV/DVD Combination or to damage to the LCD TV/DVD Combination
Headphone ø3.5mm stereo mini jack x 1 online at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as or parts caused by fires, misuse, accident,
Accessories possible. By registering your LCD TV/DVD Acts of God (such as lightning or fluctuations in
Remote control (19LV505/22LV505 : SE-R0305, 19LV506/22LV506 : SE-R0316) ................ 1
Combination you will enable TACP to bring you electric power), improper installation, improper
Batteries (R03/AAA) .............................................................................................................. 2 new products specifically designed to meet your maintenance, or use in violation of instructions
AC cord .................................................................................................................................. 1 needs and help us to contact you in the unlikely furnished by TACP; use or malfunction
Cleaning cloth .............................................................................. .......................................... 1 event a safety notification is required under the through simultaneous use of this LCD TV/DVD
Owner·s manual (this booklet) ..................................................... .......................................... 1 U.S. Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to Combination and connected equipment; or to
Quick setup guide (Spanish) .................................................................................................. 1
complete and return the product registration card units that have been modified or had the serial
• This model complies with the above specifications. does not diminish your warranty rights. number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered
• Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice. illegible.
• This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future.
70 71
CAUTION
THIS LCD COLOR TELEVISION EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.
TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS SERVICE MANUAL CARE-
FULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTENANCE,
CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION-SEE SERVICE PROCEDURE.
USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN

THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS LASER RADIATION EXPOSURE.
TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLOSURE.
VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. DO NOT
STARE INTO BEAM.
Location of the required Marking

The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.
CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA

RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS,
21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.
PREPARATION OF SERVICING
The laser diode used for a pickup head may be destroyed with external static electricity.
Moreover, even if it is operating normally after repair, when static electricity discharge is received at the
time of repair, the life of the product may be shortened.
Please perform the following measure against static electricity, be careful of destruction of a laser diode
at the time of repair.
• Place the unit on a workstation equipped to protect against static electricity, such as conductive mat.
• Soldering iron with ground wire or ceramic type is used.
• A worker needs to use a ground conductive wrist strap for body.
A1-1
SERVICING NOTICES ON CHECKING
1. KEEP THE NOTICES 6. PERFORM A SAFETY CHECK AFTER
As for the places which need special attentions, SERVICING
they are indicated with the labels or seals on the Confirm that the screws, parts and wiring which
cabinet, chassis and parts. Make sure to keep the were removed in order to service are put in the
indications and notices in the operation manual. original positions, or whether there are the
2. AVOID AN ELECTRIC SHOCK portions which are deteriorated around the
serviced places serviced or not. Check the
There is a high voltage part inside. Avoid an insulation between the antenna terminal or
electric shock while the electric current is external metal and the AC cord plug blades.
flowing. And be sure the safety of that.
3. USE THE DESIGNATED PARTS (INSULATION CHECK PROCEDURE)
The parts in this equipment have the specific 1. Unplug the plug from the AC outlet.
characters of incombustibility and withstand 2. Remove the antenna terminal on TV and turn
voltage for safety. Therefore, the part which is on the TV.
replaced should be used the part which has 3. Insulation resistance between the cord plug
the same character. terminals and the eternal exposure metal
Especially as to the important parts for safety [Note 2] should be more than 1M ohm by
which is indicated in the circuit diagram or the using the 500V insulation resistance meter
table of parts as a mark, the designated [Note 1].
parts must be used. 4. If the insulation resistance is less than 1M
ohm, the inspection repair should be
4. BE CAREFUL WITH THE
required.
LCD PANEL
[Note 1]
Avoid a shock to the panel while servicing. If you have not the 500V insulation
Take enough care to deal with it. resistance meter, use a Tester.
5. PUT PARTS AND WIRES IN THE [Note 2]
ORIGINAL POSITION AFTER External exposure metal: Antenna terminal
ASSEMBLING OR WIRING Headphone jack
There are parts which use the insulation
material such as a tube or tape for safety, or
which are assembled in the condition that
these do not contact with the printed board.
The inside wiring is designed not to get closer
to the pyrogenic parts and high voltage parts.
Therefore, put these parts in the original
positions.
HOW TO ORDER PARTS

Please include the following informations when you order parts. (Particularly the VERSION LETTER.)
1. MODEL NUMBER and VERSION LETTER
The MODEL NUMBER can be found on the back of each product and the VERSION LETTER can be
found at the end of the SERIAL NUMBER.
2. PART NO. and DESCRIPTION
You can find it in your SERVICE MANUAL.
A1-2
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
1) Read these instructions.
2) Keep these instructions.
3) Heed all warnings.
4) Follow all instructions.
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
6) Clean only with dry cloth.
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet,
consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and
the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manu- PORTABLE CART WARNING
(symbol provided by RETAC)
facturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long
periods of time.
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when
the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or S3126A
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the
apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
15) Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such a vases,
shall be placed on the apparatus.
16) An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric
light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside
antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits, as
contact with them might be fatal.
17) Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
18) Do not push objects through any openings in this unit, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short
out parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill or spray any type of liquid into the unit.
A1-3
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS (CONTINUED)
19) If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is
grounded to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges, Section 810 of the
National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding
conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for
the grounding electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
ANTENNA LEAD
IN WIRE
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
ELECTRIC SERVICE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

EQUIPMENT (NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE ELECTRODE SYSTEM
S2898A (NEC ART 250, PART H)
20) When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by
the manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original part.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.
21) Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to
determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.
22) Keep your fingers clear of the disc slot as it is closing. It may cause injury.
23) When you connect the product to other equipment, turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from
the wall outlet. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock and serious personal injury. Read the owner's
manual of the other equipment carefully and follow the instructions when making any connections.
24) Reduce the volume to the minimum level before you turn on the product. Otherwise, sudden high volume
sound may cause hearing or speaker damage.
A1-4
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS (CONTINUED)
25) Do not allow the product to output distorted sound for an extended period of time. It may cause speaker
overheating and fire.
26) When you use the headphones, keep the volume at a moderate level. If you use the headphones continu-
ously with high volume sound, it may cause hearing damage.
27) Do not look into the opening of the disc slot or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the
laser beam. It may cause eye damage.
28) Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious
personal injury and product malfunction.
29) This reminder is provided to call the cable TV system installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be con-
nected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.
CONDENSATION
Moisture will form in the operating section of the player if the player is brought from cool surroundings into a
warm room or if the temperature of the room rises suddenly. When this happens, player's performance will
be impaired.
To prevent this, let the player stand in its new surroundings for about an hour before switching it on, or
make sure that the room temperature rises gradually.
Condensation may also form during the summer if the player is exposed to the breeze from an air condi-
tioner. In such cases, change the location of the player.
HOW TO HANDLE THE LCD PANEL

• Do not press hard or jolt the LCD panel. It may cause the LCD panel glass to break and injury may occur.
• If the LCD panel is broken, make absolutely sure that you do not touch the liquid in the panel. This may
cause skin inflammation.
If the liquid gets in your mouth, immediately gargle and consult with your doctor. Also, if the liquid gets in
your eyes or touches your skin, consult with your doctor after rinsing for at least 15 minutes or longer in clean
water.
A1-5
WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK
[ When removing the DVD Deck ]
Before removing Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector, the short circuit the position shown in Fig.
1 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.
[ When installing the DVD Deck ]

Remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD
MT PCB connector.
NOTE
• Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF SERVICING”.
• Use the Lead Free solder.
• Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20oC
• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu
• When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the draw in equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the
Flux smoke away from it.
Pick Up PCB
Short circuit using a

soldering iron.
Fig. 1
A1-6
DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY
1. Remove the Back Cabinet and Angle Deck. (Refer to item 1 of the DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)
2. Slide the Belt Loading toward the arrow direction by hand to release the lock. (Refer to Fig. 1)
3. Take out the Disc from the DVD Deck. Be careful not to scratch on the Disc.
DVD Deck
Belt Loading
Fig. 1
PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL

4 DIGIT PASSWORD CANCELLATION
If the stored 4 digit password in the Rating Level menu needs to be cancelled, please follow the steps below.
1. Turn Unit ON.
2. Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.
3. Check that “No disc” is displayed on the screen.
4. Press and hold the “STOP” button on the side panel.
5. Simultaneously press and hold the “7” key on the remote control unit.
6. Hold both keys for more than 2 seconds.
7. The On Screen Display message “PASSWORD CLEAR” will appear.
8. The 4 digit password has now been cleared.
A1-7
REMOTE CONTROL KEY CODE
NEC Format
Custom Code : 40-BF H, 44-BB H, 45-BA H, 45-BC H
No. Key Name Custom Code Key Code
1 EJECT 45 BA F5
2 TV/DVD 45 BC B3
1 4
2 3 SLEEP 40 BF 15
3
5 4 POWER 40 BF 12
7
6 5 1 40 BF 01
8 10 6 2 40 BF 02
9
13 7 3 40 BF 03
11
12 8 4 40 BF 04
14 16 9 5 40 BF 05
15 19 10 6 40 BF 06
18
20 11 7 40 BF 07
17
12 8 40 BF 08
21 24 13 9 40 BF 09
22 23 14 DISPLAY 40 BF 1C
26 15 0 40 BF 00
25
27 16 / JUMP 44 BB 9B
29 17 SUBTITLE 44 BB 87
28 30 18 CH UP 40 BF 1B
31 19 VOLUME + 40 BF 1A
20 AUDIO SELECT 44 BB 53
32 33
21 INPUT/ZOOM 40 BF 0F
34 36 22 CH DOWN 40 BF 1F
35 23 VOLUME - 40 BF 1E
37 40 24 MUTE 40 BF 10
38 39 25 PLAY MODE 40 BF 1D
41 44
42 43 26 DVD MENU 40 BF 19
27 UP 44 BB 80
45 47 28 LEFT 44 BB 51
46
49 29 ENTER 44 BB 4E
48
30 RIGHT 44 BB 4D
31 DOWN 44 BB 81
32 MENU/SETUP 40 BF 0E
33 EXIT/CANCEL 44 BB EF
34 PAUSE 44 BB 10
35 PLAY 44 BB 15
36 STOP 44 BB 14
37 CH RTN/|<<SKIP 40 BF 17
38 <<REV 44 BB 19
39 FF>> 44 BB 13
40 CLOSED CAPTION/SKIP>>| 40 BF 57
41 <|SLOW 45 BA 0E
42 ANGLE 44 BB 96
43 MARKER 45 BA EC
44 SLOW |> 44 BB 0D
45 TOP MENU 44 BB DF
46 RETURN 44 BB 5D
47 REPEAT A-B 44 BB 5C
48 GAME 40 BF 28
49 PICTURE SIZE 40 BF 59
A1-8
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-1 TV LCD LCD Size / Visual Size 22.0 inch / 558.00mmV
System LCD Type Color TFT LCD
Number of Pixels 1680(H) x 1050(V)
View Range Left/Right 85/85 degree
Up/Down 80/80 degree
Bright Dot <
n=0
Zero Bright Dot Ratio --
Color System NTSC
Speaker 2 Speaker
Position Front
Size 1.2 x 2.8 inch
Impedance 8 ohm
Sound Output Max 1.5W + 1.5W
10%(Typical) ---
G-2 DVD System Color System NTSC
Disc DVD, CD-
DVD-R/RW (Video Format Only)
Disc Diameter 120 mm , 80 mm
Drive DSM-2
Search speed Fwd 4 step
Actual 2-45 times (DVD)
4-40 times (CD)
Rev 4 step
Actual 2-45 times (DVD)
4-40 times (CD)
Slow speed Fwd 1/7 -1/2 times
Actual --
Rev 1/7 -1/2 times
Actual --
G-3 Tuning Broadcasting System Analog US System M
System Digital ATSC(8VSB)/QAM
Tuner and System 1Tuner
Receive CH Destination US (W/CABLE)
CH Coverage 2~69, 4A, A-5~A-1, A~I, J~W, W+1~W+84
Intermediate Digital 44.00MHz
Frequency Analog Picture(FP) 45.75MHz
Sound(FS) 41.25MHz
FP-FS 4.50MHz
Preset CH No
Stereo/Dual TV Sound US-Stereo
Tuner Sound Muting Yes
G-4 Signal Video Signal Input Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm
Output Level --
S/N Ratio (Weighted) --
Horizontal Resolution at DVD Mode --
--
RGB Signal Output Level --
Audio Signal Input Level -8.0dBm/50k ohm
Output Level at DVD --
at TV --
--
Digital Output Level 0.5 V p-p/75 ohm
S/N Ratio at DVD (Weighted) --
Harmonic Distortion --
Frequency Response : at DVD --
at Video CD --
at SVCD --
at CD --
A2-1
G-5 Power Power Source AC 120V, 60Hz
DC --
Power Consumption at AC 65W at 120V 60Hz
at DC --
Stand by (at AC) 1W at 120V 60Hz
Energy Star Yes
Per Year -- kWh/Year
Protector Power Fuse Yes
Safety Circuit Yes
IC Protector(Micro Fuse) Yes
G-6 Regulation Safety UL(UL6500_2nd)
Radiation FCC
Laser DHHS
o o
G-7 Temperature Operation +5 C ~ +40 C
o o
Storage -20 C ~ +60 C
G-8 Operating Humidity Less than 80% RH
G-9 Clock and Clock (Only Broadcasting data) No
Timer Sleep Timer Max Time 120 Min
On Timer Program No
Off Timer Program No
Game Timer No
Wake Up Timer No
Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode) more than -- Min Sec
A2-2
G-10 Remote Unit RC-LT
Control Glow in Dark Remocon Yes
Remocon Format TOSHIBA
Format TOSHIBA
Custom Code 40-BF h ,44-BB h ,45-BA h ,45-BC h
Power Source Voltage(D.C) 3V
UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs
Total Keys 49 Keys
Keys Power Yes
Eject Yes
Sleep Yes
TV/DVD Yes
1 Yes
2 Yes
3 Yes
4 Yes
5 Yes
6 Yes
7 Yes
8 Yes
9 Yes
0 Yes
Jump / - Yes
Display Yes
Subtitle Yes
Audio Select Yes
Input Select / Zoom Yes
Mute Yes
CH Up Yes
CH Down Yes
Vol Up Yes
Vol Down Yes
Play Mode Yes
DVD Menu Yes
Up Yes
Down Yes
Left Yes
Right Yes
Enter Yes
Menu / Setup Yes
Exit / Cancel Yes
Game Yes
Picture Size Yes
Pause Yes
Play Yes
Stop Yes
Skip+ / Closed Caption Yes
Skip- / CH Return Yes
Search+ Yes
Search- Yes
Slow+ Yes
Slow- Yes
Angle Yes
Marker Yes
Top Menu Yes
Return Yes
Closed Caption No
Repeat A-B Yes
Zoom/ Quick View No
Freeze frame No
A2-3
G-11 Features Auto Shut Off Yes
Auto Search No
Power On Memory Yes
Comb Filter Yes
3 -D
Game Position Yes
Auto Setup(Language/CH Program) Yes
Picture Setting(TV) Yes
Picture Preference Yes
Brightness , Contrast , Color Yes
Tint Yes
Sharpness Yes
Color Temperature Yes
DNR Yes
Cable Clear No
Picture Setting(PC) Yes
HOR Position , VER Position Yes
Phase, Clock Yes
Red, Green, Blue No
Auto Adjust No
Backlight No
Audio MTS Yes
Tone Control (Bass/Treble/Balance) Yes
Stable Sound No
Surround No
BBE No
SRS WOW (SRS 3D/Focus/Tru Bass) No
Variable Audio Out No
Tuning CH Program Yes
Air/Cable Yes
ADD/DELETE Yes
Label CH Label Yes
Video Label Yes
Favorite CH No
V-Chip Yes
Type USA Type
RRT Setup Yes
Lock Hotel Lock No
Channel Lock No
Video Lock No
Panel Lock No
English
Menu Language French
Spanish
Closed Caption Yes
CC Advanced Yes
Picture Size Yes
HD Zoom No
Picture Scroll No
Film Mode Yes
Aspect Yes
Backlight Yes
PFC(Power Factor circuit) No
Freeze frame No
PIP/POP No
Direct Input Selection Yes
Digital Out Dolby Digital Yes
MPEG No
PCM No
DTS No
A2-4
PC Monitor Input Yes
VGA (640x480) Yes (60Hz)
VGA (720x400) Yes (70Hz)
WVGA (848x480) No
SVGA (800x600) Yes (60Hz)
XGA (1024x768) Yes (60Hz)
WXGA (1280x768) Yes (60Hz)
WXGA (1280x720) Yes (60Hz)
WXGA (1360x768) Yes (60Hz)
SXGA (1280x1024) No
HDMI Input Yes
VGA (640×480) Yes (60Hz)
720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz)
720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz)
720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz)
720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz)
720×576i (4:3) No
720×576i (16:9) No
720×576p (4:3) No
720×576p (16:9) No
1280×720p Yes (60Hz)
1920×1080i Yes (60Hz)
CEC (ORION Standard) No
Deep Color No
xvYCC No
Component Input Yes
720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz)
720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz)
720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz)
720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz)
720×576i (4:3) No
720×576i (16:9) No
720×576p (4:3) No
720×576p (16:9) No
1280×720p Yes (60Hz)
1920×1080i Yes (60Hz)
Wall Mount Size W x H(mm) Yes (100 x 100)
Screw Size M4 x 10
Features Video CD Playback Yes
(DVD) SVCD Playback No
MP3 Playback Yes
JPEG Yes
WMA Yes
Divx Playback Yes
DMF Support No
Digital Out (Dolby Digital) Yes
(MPEG) Yes
(PCM) Yes
(DTS) Yes
Down Mix Out (Dolby Digital) Yes
(DTS) No
Closed Caption Yes
Screen Saver No
TV Screen 4:3 (Letter Box, Pan Scan) Yes
16:9 (Wide) Yes
Audio DAC 192kHz / 24bit
A2-5
G-12 Accessories Owner's Manual Language English
w/Guarantee Card Yes
Remote Control Unit Yes
Rod Antenna No
Poles --
Terminal --
Loop Antenna No
Terminal --
U/V Mixer No
DC Car Cord (Center+) No
Guarantee Card No
Warning Sheet No
Circuit Diagram No
Antenna Change Plug No
Service Facility List No
Important Safeguard No
Dew/AHC Caution Sheet No
Quick Set-up Sheet(Spanish) Yes
Battery Yes
UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs
OEM Brand No
AC Adapter No
AC Cord (for AC Adapter) No
AC Cord Yes
AV Cord (2Pin-1Pin) No
Registration Card (NDL Card) Yes
300 to 75ohm Antenna Adapter No
Sheet Information (Return) Yes(USA version)
Sheet Information (HDMI) No
Cleaning Cloth Yes
G-13 Interface Switch Side Power (Tact) Yes
Channel Up/Menu Up/Play Yes
Channel Down/Menu Down/Stop Yes
Volume Up/Menu > Yes
Volume Down/Menu < Yes
Menu Yes
Play No (CH+ Alternative)
Eject Yes
Skip+, Search+ No
Skip-, Search- No
Still/Pause No
Stop No (CH- Alternative)
Main Power SW No
Input Select/Enter Yes
Rear Main Power SW No
A2-6
Indicator Power/Stand-By Yes (Green / Red)
Power Wake Up No
On Timer No
Terminals Rear Video Input 1 RCA x 1
Audio Input 1 RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)
S - Input 1 Yes
Video Input 2 No
Audio Input 2 No
S - Input 2 No
Video Output No
Audio Output No
Component Input 1 RCA x 3
Analog Audio RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)
Component Input 2 No
Analog Audio No
HDMI Input 1 Yes
Analog Audio PC Audio Input Alternative
HDMI Input 2 No
Analog Audio No
Sub Woofer Out No
PC Monitor Input Yes
Analog Audio Mini Pin Jack( 3.5), STEREO
Digital Audio Output Coaxial
DC Jack (Center +) No
VHF/UHF Antenna Input F Type
Video Input 3 No
Audio Input 3 No
S - Input 3 No
Other Terminal Headphone
AC Inlet Yes
G-14 Set Size Approx. W x D x H (mm) 536.5 x 207 x 439.5
w/o Handle, Stand Approx. W x D x H (mm) 536.5 x 67 x 403
G-15 Weight Net (Approx.) 6.1kg (13.5lbs)
Net w/o Handle, Stand (Approx.) 5.4kg (11.9bs)
Gross (Approx.) 8.2kg (18.1lbs)
G-16 Carton Master Carton No
Content --- Sets
Material --- / ---
Dimensions W x D x H(mm) ---
Description of Origin ---
Gift Box Material Double/Full Color
W/Color Photo Label No
W/Handle Yes
Dimensions W x D x H(mm) 608 x 605 x 181
Description of Origin Yes
Drop Test 6 Surfaces
Height (cm) 80
Container Stuffing (40' container) 737 Sets/40' container
w/Pallet No
w/Wrapping No
G-17 Material Cabinet Front PC+ABS 94V0 NON-HALOGEN
Rear PS 94V0 NON-DECABROM
Jack Panel --
PCB Non-Halogen Demand No
Eyelet Demand Yes
G-18 Environment Environmental standard requirement Green procurement of ORION
Pb-free Phase3(Phase3A)
Measures for Whisker Yes
A2-7
1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS 1-3: POWER PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-3)
AND P.C. BOARDS 1. Remove the Holder PCB in the direction of arrow (A).
2. Disconnect the following connectors:
(CD301, CP501 and CP8101).
CAUTION
3. Remove the 6 screws (1).
Be careful not to remove the FFC cable forcibly, because
4. Remove the Power PCB in the direction of arrow (B).
the FFC cable may be damaged.
1-1: STAND ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 1-1)

Holder PCB
1. Remove the 2 screws (1). (A)
2. Remove the Stand Ass'y in the direction of arrow. (1)
(1)(1)(1) (1)
(1) CD301
CP8101
Power PCB
CP501
(B)
(2) (1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
Stand Ass'y
(2) Fig. 1-3
1-4: DIGITAL PCB AND OPERATION PCB

(Refer to Fig. 1-4)
Fig. 1-1
(CP2201 and CP3002).
1-2: FRONT CABINET ASS'Y, LCD PANEL AND 2. Remove the 4 screws (1).
REMOCON PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-2) 3. Remove the Spring Earth 1 in the direction of arrow (A).
1. Remove the Front Cabinet Ass'y in the direction of arrow 4. Remove the 2 screws (2).
(A). 5. Remove the Digital PCB in the direction of arrow (B).
2. Disconnect the following connectors: 6. Remove the 3 screws (3).
(CD7005, CD7006 and CP2804). 7. Remove the Operation PCB in the direction of arrow (C).
3. Remove the LCD PANEL in the direction of arrow (B).
4. Disconnect the following connector: (CP7601).
5. Unlock the support (1). (1)
(1)(1)
6. Remove the Remocon PCB in the direction of arrow (C). (1)
Spring Earth-1
(2)
(A) (2)
CP3002 Digital PCB
Front Cabinet Ass'y (B)

LCD Panel (3)
(A) CP2201
(3)
(3)
Operation PCB
(C)
CD7006 Remocon PCB
CD7005 (B)
CP7601
(C)
Support Fig. 1-4
(1)
CP2804
Fig. 1-2
B1-1
1-5: DVD DECK (Refer to Fig. 1-5)
1. Short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1-5 using a
soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no
soldering, the Laser may be damaged.
3. Remove the DVD Deck in the direction of arrow (A).
(CP2301, CP2302 and CP2303).
6. Remove the Angle Mpeg in the direction of arrow (B).
8. Remove the DVD MT PCB in the direction of arrow (C).
(1)
(1)
Angle Mpeg
(C)
CP2303
CP2302
CP2301
(B) (1)
DVD MT PCB (3) (3)(3)
Pick Up PCB
(3)
(1)
DVD Deck
(2)
Short circuit using a (A)
soldering iron. (2)
(A)
Fig. 1-5
NOTE
1. Before your operation, please read "PREPARATION OF
SERVICING"
2. Use the Lead Free solder.
3. Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20oC
• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu
4. When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the drawing
equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the Flux smoke
away from it.
5. When installing the DVD Deck, remove all the soldering
on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up
PCB and DVD MT PCB connector.
B1-2
2. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS

Check Hook
NOTE Check Hook Check Hook
1. Disassemble only the DVD DECK PARTS parts listed

here. Minute adjustments are needed if the disassembly
is done. If the repair is needed except listed parts, replace
the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.
2-1: TRAVERSE ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-1-A) Loader Ass'y (Top Side)
1. Remove the 3 screws (1). Fig. 2-1-D
2. Unlock the 2 supports (2).
3. Remove the Insulator (R) from the Loader Sub Ass'y. 2-2: SWITCH PCB ASS'Y/GEAR MIDDLE/GEAR FEED/RACK
4. Remove the Traverse Ass'y. FEED ASS'Y/FEED MOTOR (Refer to Fig. 2-2-A)
1. Remove the Insulator (F).
2. Remove the Insulator (R).
3. Unlock the support (1).
(2)
4. Remove the Gear Middle.
(2) 5. Remove the screw (2).
Loader Sub Ass'y
6. Remove the Rack Feed Ass'y.
7. Remove the screw (3).
8. Remove the Switch PCB Ass'y.
Insulator (R) 9. Remove the screw (4).
10. Remove the Gear Feed.
Traverse Ass'y 11. Remove the 2 screws (5).
12. Remove the Feed Motor.
13. Remove the Gear Motor.
(1)
(1)
(1)
• Screw Torque: 2.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm
Fig. 2-1-A Feed Motor
Gear Motor
NOTE Traverse Ass'y Insulator (R)
1. In case of the Traverse Ass'y installation, hook the wire

on the Loader Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-1-B to Fig. 2-1-C. Insulator (F)
Loader Ass'y (Bottom Side)
(1) (5)
(5)
Gear Feed
Insulator (F) (4)
Check Lock Check Lock Rack Feed Ass'y Gear Middle

(2)
Check Hook
Fig. 2-1-B Switch PCB Ass'y
(3)
80 ± 5mm • Screw Torque: 1.3 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 2)
• Screw Torque: 3.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 3)
• Screw Torque: 1.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 4, 5)
Fig. 2-2-A
Loader Ass'y
Check Hook
Fig. 2-1-C
B2-1
NOTE
Traverse Ass'y
1. When installing the Rack Feed Ass'y, push both ends to Check Hook
align the teeth as shown Fig. 2-2-B. Then install it.
2. In case of the Gear Motor installation, check if the value
Check Hook
of the Fig. 2-2-C is correct.
Check Hook
3. When installing the wire of the Switch PCB Ass'y, install it
correctly as Fig. 2-2-D.
Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20oC Check Hook
• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds • Loosen the wire in the direction of the arrow.
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu Fig. 2-2-E
4. After the assembly of the Traverse Ass'y, hook the wire
on the Traverse Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-2-E. 2-3: FFC WIRE HANDLING
Rack Feed Ass'y 1. When installing the FFC, fold it correctly and install it as
shown from Fig. 2-3-A to Fig. 2-3-B.
NOTE
Push Push
1. Do not make the folding lines except the specified
positions for the FFC.
[OK] [NG]
[ 24 pin FFC ]
Fold it by 90û
To Pick Up PCB Printing Surface

Fig. 2-2-B
20 ± 1mm
30 ± 1mm
Gear Motor
8.0 ± 0.2mm
Fig. 2-3-A
Feed Motor
[ 6 pin FFC ]
40 ± 1mm
Safety surface for pressing

of the insert. Fold
Fig. 2-2-C
Printing Surface
Switch PCB Ass'y

~ FEED MOTOR ~
WHITE (4)
BROWN (3)
• Install wire from (1) to (4) in order.

Fig. 2-3-B
~ SPINDLE MOTOR ~
YELLOW (2)
GREEN (1)
Fig. 2-2-D
B2-2
3. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF 3. When IC starts moving back and forth easily after
desoldering completely, pickup the corner of the IC using
FLAT PACKAGE IC tweezers and remove the IC by moving with the IC
desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-3.)
REMOVAL
NOTE
1. Put Masking Tape (cotton tape) around the Flat Package
Some ICs on the PCB are affixed with glue, so be
IC to protect other parts from any damage. careful not to break or damage the foil of each IC
(Refer to Fig. 3-1.) leads or solder lands under the IC when removing it.
NOTE
Masking is carried out on all the parts located within Blower type IC
10 mm distance from IC leads. desoldering
machine
Masking Tape IC
(Cotton Tape)
Tweezers
Fig. 3-1
IC
Fig. 3-3
2. Heat the IC leads using a blower type IC desoldering
machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-2.)
4. Peel off the Masking Tape.
NOTE
Do not rotate or move the IC back and forth , until IC 5. Absorb the solder left on the pattern using the Braided
can move back and forth easily after desoldering the Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-4.)
leads completely. NOTE
Do not move the Braided Shield Wire in the vertical
direction towards the IC pattern.
Blower type IC
desoldering machine
Braided Shield Wire
Soldering Iron
IC
IC pattern Fig. 3-4
Fig. 3-2
B3-1
INSTALLATION 4. When bridge-soldering between terminals and/or the
soldering amount are not enough, resolder using a Thin-
1. Take care of the polarity of new IC and then install the tip Soldering Iron. (Refer to Fig. 3-8.)
new IC fitting on the printed circuit pattern. Then solder
each lead on the diagonal positions of IC temporarily.
(Refer to Fig. 3-5.)
Thin-tip Soldering Iron IC
Soldering Iron
Fig. 3-8
5. Finally, confirm the soldering status on four sides of the

Solder temporarily Solder temporarily
IC using a magnifying glass.
Confirm that no abnormality is found on the soldering
Fig. 3-5 position and installation position of the parts around the
IC. If some abnormality is found, correct by resoldering.
2. Supply the solder from the upper position of IC leads NOTE
sliding to the lower position of the IC leads.
When the IC leads are bent during soldering and/or
(Refer to Fig. 3-6.)
repairing, do not repair the bending of leads. If the
bending of leads are repaired, the pattern may be
damaged. So, always be sure to replace the IC in this
case.
Solder Soldering Iron
IC Supply soldering
from upper position
to lower position
Fig. 3-6
3. Absorb the solder left on the lead using the Braided

Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-7.)
NOTE
Do not absorb the solder to excess.
Soldering Iron
IC
Braided Shield Wire
Fig. 3-7
B3-2
SERVICE MODE LIST
This unit is provided with the following SERVICE MODES so you can repair, examine and adjust easily.
To enter to the SERVICE MODE function, press and hold both buttons simultaneously on the main unit and on the remote
control for more than a the standard time in the appropriate condition. (See below chart.)
Set Remocon Standard

Set Key Operations
Condition Key Time
VOL. DOWN
TV mode 0 2 sec. Releasing of V-CHIP PASSWORD.
(Minimum)
Initialization of factory TV data.
VOL. DOWN
TV mode 1 2 sec. NOTE: If you set factory initialization, the memories are reset such
(Minimum)
as the channel setting, and the POWER ON total hours.
DVD mode VOL. DOWN Initialization of factory DVD data.

4 2 sec.
(No disc) (Minimum)
DVD mode VOL. DOWN DVD Write mode.

5 2 sec.
(No disc) (Minimum) Refer to the "RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE".
VOL. DOWN POWER ON total hours are displayed on the screen.

ALL mode 6 2 sec. Can be checked of the INITIAL DATA of MEMORY IC.
(Minimum)
Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".
VOL. DOWN Check of the SUM DATA and MICON VERSION on the screen.
ALL mode 8 2 sec.
(Minimum) Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".
Display of the Adjustment MENU on the screen.

VOL. DOWN
ALL mode 9 2 sec. Refer to the "ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT" (On-Screen Display
(Minimum)
Adjustment).
DVD mode DCheck of the firmware

V version. D
STOP 1 2 sec.
(No disc) Refer to the "RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE".
DVD mode Releasing of PARENTAL LOCK.

STOP 7 2 sec.
(No disc) Refer to the "PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL".
C-1
SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS
Ref. No. Part No. Parts Name Remarks
JG176 Up-Date Disc
JG176 APJG176139 Up-Date Disc Up-Date of the Firmware
RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE

1. Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.
2. Confirm that the "No Disc" will be appeared on the screen.
3. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (5) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
4. Press VOL. UP/DOWN button on the unit to check if all the keys on the unit do not function.
NOTE: To check if DVD Write mode is set.
When inserting Up-Date Disc at Non DVD Write mode, the read error will happen.
5. Insert the Up-Date Disc. (Refer to SERVICING FIXTURE AND TOOLS)
6. Automatic read will start and "Firmware upgrade Please Wait" will be displayed on the screen.
At this time, the horizontal noise lines may appear. But no problem.
NOTE: Do not turn off the unit on the way or operate the keys on the unit and remocon.
Up-Date error will happen and can not be done with the Up-Date of Up-Date Disc.
7. After the Up-Date, Logo screen will appear.
8. Unplug the AC cord, then plug it in.
After the write, set to the initializing of shipping.

The "INITIALIZE 5 ---> COMPLETE" will appear on the screen.
11. Then unplug the AC cord, and plug it in.
CHECK FOR THE FIRMWARE VERSION

13. Press both Channel button (1) on the remote control and the STOP button on the set for more than 2 seconds.
Firmware version will be displayed on the top left of the screen.
No Disc
ADLJB8214A A D L J B 8 2 1 4 A
Fixed Released times on the same date

Release date (Example: 2008.02.14)
When the changed version displays, the Re-write will be completed. A = October
B = November
14. Turn off the power C = December
C-2
WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC
CONFIRMATION OF CHECK SUM, POWER ON TOTAL HOURS AND MICON VERSION
Initial total of MEMORY IC, POWER ON total hours and MICON VERSIONcan be checked on the screen. Total hours are
displayed in 16 system of notation.
NOTE: If you set a factory initialization, the total hours is reset to "0".
Please refer to "CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA" when SUM DATA is not corresponding.
1. Turn on the POWER, and set to the ALL mode.
2. Set the VOLUME to minimum.
4. After the confirmation of each check sum, turn off the power.
NOTE:The each item value might be different according to each set.
CHECK SUM: 40D3 Initial setting data check sum.

LCD PWR ON: 0000 POWER ON total hours.
= (16 x 16 x 16 x thousands digit value)
Sub Micon check version SUB: DA0E77Y221 + (16 x 16 x hundreds digit value)
+ (16 x tens digit value)
Main Micon check version DTV: CA07E84181 + (ones digit value)
EEPROM check version EEPROM: W50T01CM00
Parameter Picture: _dispSmartPic
FIG. 1
CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA
If a service repair is undertaken where it has been required to change the MEMORY IC, the following steps should be taken
to ensure correct data settings while making reference to INITIAL SETTING TABLE (Attached "INITIAL DATA").
1. Turn on the POWER, and set to the ALL mode.
ADDRESS and DATA should appear as FIG 2.
NOTE: No need to set data other position than 7200~73FF.
ADDRESS DATA
INIT : 0001 0099
SUB: DA0E77Y221
DTV: CA07E84181
EEPROM: W50T01CM00
FIG. 2
4. ADDRESS is now selected and should "blink". Using the UP/DOWN buton on the remote, step through the ADDRESS
until required ADDRESS to be changed is reached.
5. Press LEFT/RIGHT button to select DATA. When DATA is selected, it will "blink".
6. Again, step through the DATA using UP/DOWN button until required DATA value has been selected.
7. Pressing RIGHT/LEFT button will take you back to ADDRESS for further selection if necessary.
8. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until all data has been checked.
9. When satisfied correct DATA has been entered, turn POWER off (return to STANDBY MODE) to finish DATA input.
After the data input, set to the initializing of shipping.

10. Turn on the Power.
13. After the finishing of the initializing of shipping, the unit will turn off automatically.
The unit will now have the correct DATA for the new MEMORY IC.
C-3
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
1. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE NO. FUNCTION NO. FUNCTION
Read and perform these adjustments when repairing the 03 R DRIVE(N) 31 BAK LIGHT MIN
circuits or replacing electrical parts or PCB assemblies. 04 R CUT OFF(N) 32 BRIGHTNESS CENT
05 G DRIVE(N) 33 BRIGHTNESS MAX
CAUTION 06 G CUT OFF(N) 34 BRIGHTNESS MIN
07 B DRIVE(N) 35 TINT
• Use an isolation transformer when performing any 36 SHARP H1 MAX
08 B CUT OFF(N)
service on this chassis. 09 R DRIVE(C) 37 SHARP H1 MIN
• When removing a PCB or related component, after 10 R CUT OFF(C) 38 SHARP H2 MAX
unfastening or changing a wire, be sure to put the wire 11 G DRIVE(C) 39 SHARP H2 MIN
back in its original position. 12 G CUT OFF(C) 40 SHARP V1 MAX
• When you exchange IC and Transistor with a heat sink, 13 B DRIVE(C) 41 SHARP V1 MIN
apply silicon grease on the contact section of the heat 14 B CUT OFF(C) 42 CONTRAST CENTER
sink. Before applying new silicon grease, remove all the 15 R DRIVE(W) 43 CONTRAST MAX
16 R CUT OFF(W) 44 CONTRAST MIN
old silicon grease. (Old grease may cause damages to 45 COLOR CENTER
17 G DRIVE(W)
the IC and Transistor). 18 G CUT OFF(W) 46 COLOR MAX
19 B DRIVE(W) 47 COLOR MIN
Prepare the following measurement tools for electrical 20 B CUT OFF(W) 50 CONTRAST 40
adjustments. 29 BAK LIGHT CENT
30 BAK LIGHT MAX
1. Pattern Generator
Fig. 1-2
On-Screen Display Adjustment
1. Set the VOLUME to minimum. 2. BASIC ADJUSTMENTS
2. Press the VOL. DOWN button on the set and the
channel button (9) on the remote control for more than 2-1: WHITE BALANCE
2 seconds to display adjustment mode on the screen as 1. Place the set in Aging Test for more than 15 minutes.
shown in Fig. 1-1. 2. Receive the gray scale pattern from the Pattern
Generator.
3. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control
to set to the AV mode.
4. Using the remote control, set the brightness and
TV
FULL contrast to normal position.
480i 5. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-2 and
press the channel button (03) on the remote control to
select "R DRIVE(N)".
6. Press the CH. UP/DOWN button on the remote control
to select the "R DRIVE (N)", "R CUT OFF (N)",
Function 03 R DRIVE (N) 14 Step No.
"B DRIVE (N)", "B CUT OFF (N)", "R DRIVE (C)",
"R CUT OFF (C)", "B DRIVE (C)", "B CUT OFF (C)",
"R DRIVE (W)","R CUT OFF (W), "B DRIVE (W)" or
Fig. 1-1 "B CUTOFF(W)".
7. Adjust the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control
3. Use the CH. UP/DOWN button or Channel button (0-9) to whiten the R DRIVE (N), R CUT OFF (N),
on the remote control to select the options shown in B DRIVE (N), B CUT OFF (N), R DRIVE (C),
Fig. 1-2. R CUT OFF (C), B DRIVE (C), B CUT OFF (C),
4. Press the MENU SETUP button on the remote control to R DRIVE (W) ,R CUT OFF (W), B DRIVE (W) and
end the adjustments. B CUTOFF(W) at each step tone sections equally.
5. To display the adjustment screen for TV, AV, GAME, 8. Perform the above adjustments 6 and 7 until the white
COMPONENT, HDMI, PC and DVD mode, press the color is achieved.
INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control.
6. Receive the DIGITAL broadcasting.
7. To display the adjustment screen for DTV mode, select
the digital channel.
8. Press the VOL.DOWN button on the set and the channel
(9) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
D-1
2-2: Confirmation of Fixed Value (Step No.)
Please check if the fixed values of each of the adjustment item is set correctly referring below. (TV/AV/GAME/COMPONENT/HDMI/DVD/PC/DTV)
AV GAME COMPONENT HDMI DVD PC DTV

TV
NO. FUNCTION CVBS Y/C 480i 480p 720p 1080i 480i 480p 720p 1080i VGA 640*480 720*400 800*600 1024*768 1280*768 1280*720 852*480 1360*768 1280*1024 1440*900 480i 480p 720p 1080i
Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No.
3 R DRIVE (N) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * - - * * * *
4 R CUTOFF (N) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * - - * * * *
5 G DRIVE (N) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 - - 0 0 0 0
6 G CUTOFF (N) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 - - 0 0 0 0
7 B DRIVE (N) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * - - * * * *
8 B CUTOFF (N) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * - - * * * *
9 R DRIVE (C) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * - - * * * *
10 R CUTOFF (C) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * - - * * * *
11 G DRIVE (C) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 - - 0 0 0 0
12 G CUTOFF (C) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 - - 0 0 0 0
13 B DRIVE (C) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * - - * * * *
14 B CUTOFF (C) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * - - * * * *
15 R DRIVE (W) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * - - * * * *
16 R CUTOFF (W) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * - - * * * *
17 G DRIVE (W) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 - - 0 0 0 0
18 G CUTOFF (W) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 - - 0 0 0 0
19 B RRIVE (W) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * - - * * * *
20 B CUTOFF (W) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * - - * * * *
29 BAK LIGHT CENT 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 - 75 - - 75 75 75 75
30 BAK LIGHT MAX 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 - 100 - - 100 100 100 100
31 BAK LIGHT MIN 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 - 30 - - 30 30 30 30
32 BRIGHTNESS CENT 112 116 116 116 120 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 115 128 128 128 128 128 128 - 128 - - 128 128 128 128
33 BRIGHTNESS MAX 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 145 145 145 145 145 145 - 145 - - 180 180 180 180
34 BRIGHTNESS MIN 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 96 96 96 96 96 96 - 96 - - 50 50 50 50
35 TINT 128 122 122 122 121 122 129 129 128 128 128 128 128 122 128 128 128 128 128 128 - 128 - - 122 122 122 122
36 SHARP H1 MAX 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 - 511 - - 511 511 511 511
37 SHARP H1 MIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 - - 0 0 0 0
38 SHARP H2 MAX 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 - 511 - - 511 511 511 511
39 SHARP H2 MIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 - - 0 0 0 0
40 SHARP V1 MAX 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 - 511 - - 511 511 511 511
41 SHARP V1 MIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 - - 0 0 0 0
42 CONTRAST CENTER * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * - - * * * *
43 CONTRAST MAX * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * - - * * * *
44 CONTRAST MIN 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 - 50 - - 50 50 50 50
45 COLOR CENT 130 140 140 140 115 120 120 120 140 163 163 163 163 140 128 128 128 128 128 128 - 128 - - 140 140 140 140
46 COLOR MAX 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 - 255 - - 255 255 255 255
47 COLOR MIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 - - 0 0 0 0
50 CONTRAST 40 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * - - * * * *
NOTE: For the step no. with * mark, please adjust it according to the situation of the set.
D-2 D-3
3. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE (WIRING CONNECTION)
LCD PANEL
DVD MT PCB
DVD DECK
CP8501
CP2301 CD2001
CP2302
CP8502
CP2303
CD2301
OPERATION PCB
CP2201
CD7005
CP7601
OS7601
REMOCON PCB
CD7006
CD3002
CD2804
CP3001
CP501
CP3002 CP2804
J8101
J8104
CD6202
J8102
CP4301
CP8101
J501
J301
CD6203
TU5801
CD301 J8103 J4302 CP3602 J4301

POWER PCB CP4303
SPEAKER
DIGITAL PCB
D-4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
(LCD SECTION)
POWER DOES NOT TURN ON
Yes
Is F501 broken? Change F501.
No
No Check IC501 and peripheral

Is there voltage at pin
6 of IC501 21V? circuit.
Yes
Yes
Is R510 broken? Change R510.
No
Change Digital PCB.
E-1
THE PICTURE APPEARS,

BUT THE AUDIO DOES NOT
APPEARS. (AT RF MODE)
No
Is CD301 connected? Connect CD301.
Yes
Is there signal at pins 1 Yes

Change SP301 and SP302.
and 4 of CD301?
No
Is there signal at pins 2 Yes Check IC301 and peripheral

and 4 of IC301? circuit.
No
Is there signal at pins Yes

AA3 and AA4 of IC2801? Check Connection of CP4301.
No
Is there signal at pins 1 Yes Check IC6551 and

and 2 of IC6551? peripheral circuit.
No
Is there signal at pin Yes Check IC6552,IC6553 and

3 of IC6552,IC6553? peripheral circuit.
No
Is there signal at pin Yes

Check IC5801 and peripheral
5 of TU5801? circuit.
No
Change TU5801.
E-2
THE PICTURE DOES NOT

APPEAR
No Is CD7005,CD7006 No
Does backlight shine? Connected CD7005,CD7006.
connected ?
Yes Yes
No Check IC7001 and

Is the signal pin 18
and 19 of IC7001 ? peripheral circuit.
Yes
No
Is the voltage at pin Check F7001.
20 of IC7001 12V ?
Yes
No
Is CD2804 connected? Connected CD2804.
Yes
No
Is there voltage at pins 1,2 Check Q3009 and peripheral
and 16 of CP2804 5V? circuit.
Yes
Is there signal at pins 5,6,7,

8,9,11,12,13,14,15,20,21, Yes
22,23,24,26,27,28,29 and 30 Change V2801(PANEL).
of CP2804?
No
Change DIGITAL PCB.
E-3
THE COLOR DOES NOT

APPEAR
No
Is setting of color
Adjust the color.
normal?
Yes
No
Is the color signal Receive the color signal.
received?
Yes
No
Is there color signal
Check IC2801 and
at IC2801?
peripheral circuit.
Yes
Change DIGITAL PCB.
E-4
(DVD SECTION)
DOES NOT DISPLAY DVD

PICTURE
Yes
Does this display
Check the disc.
logo picture?
No
Yes Check pins 8 and 10 of

Is there signal at pins 149
and 151 of IC4001? CP8501 and peripheral circuit.
No
Does IC4001 gets Yes

P.CON+3.3V and Change IC4001.
P.CON+1.8V?
No
Check P.CON+3.3V and

P.CON+1.8V line.
E-5
DISC DOES NOT EJECT
No No Check pins J18 and J19 of

Does OSD appear Is remote key set
IC2801 and peripheral
on the screen? effectively?
circuit.
Yes Yes
Check pins 138 and 139

of IC4001 and peripheral
circuit.
No No Check IC4001 and

Does this eject disc at Is there signal at pins 4
change DVD DECK? peripheral circuit.
and 5 of CP2302?
Yes Yes
Change DVD DECK. No

Change IC2301.
and 2 of CP2302?
Yes
Change IC4001.
E-6
DOES NOT PLAY DVD Change DVD DECK.
No
Yes Does CD2001 connect Yes Is the voltage between

Does this display
with CP2301 correctly? JG017 and JG018 less
"INCORRECT DISC"?
than 0.6V?
No No Yes
Connect CD2301.
Does this display No

Change IC4001.
reading mark?
Yes
No
Does disc rotate? Change DVD DECK.
Yes
Change IC4001.
E-7
DOES NOT PLAY CD

Change DVD DECK.
No
Yes Does CD2001 connect Yes Is the voltage between

Does this display
with CP2301 correctly? JG019 and JG018 less
"INCORRECT DISC"?
than 0.6V?
No No Yes
Connect CD2301.
Does this display No

Change IC4001.
reading mark?
Yes
No
Does disc rotate? Change DVD DECK.
Yes
Change IC4001.
E-8
NO SOUND DVD/CD ANALOG

AUDIO
Is there signal at pins No

113, 114, 115 and Change IC4001.
116 of IC4001?
Yes
No Check pins 1 and 7 of IC8501

and 7 of IC8501? and peripheral circuit.
Yes
No
Does CD8501 connected? Connected CD8501.
Yes
Change DIGITAL PCB.
NO SOUND DVD/CD DIGITAL

AUDIO
Is there signal at pin1 Yes

of CP8501? Change DIGITAL PCB.
No
Yes
Is there signal at pin122 Check line circuit IC4001
of IC4001? to CP8501.
No
Change IC4001.
E-9
DVD BLOCK DIAGRAM
DVD LOADER
DSM2
LCD BLOCK
DUPRD1
MD_DVD, MD_CD TX
DUPTD1
RF, A, B, C, D, E, F RX
TIN_SW
START_SW
OPU SPDIF
MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP SPDIF-134
DVD_CD, DVD_LD, CD_LD IC4001 DAC_VIDEO_C/D
C_VIDEO
ZR36966ELCG-D-G DAC_VIDEO_A
TR+/-, FO+/-, SPINDLE/SLED/ Y_VIDEO
MOT_LD+/-, FOCUS/TRACK_PWM, RESET
SPINDLE/ MOT_SLED+/- TRAY_CLOSE/OPEN DVD RESET
Motor Drive SYS_MUTE
STEPING/ MOT_SPDL+/- ZERO
IC2301 SPDL_SENS+/-
SLED LA6565VR-TLM-E
MOTOR
AUDIO AMP DVD_AUDIO_L
HOME, TIN_SW, TOUT_SW DVD_A_OUT_L
IC8501
APWM_L+/-, NJM4565M(TE1) DVD_AUDIO_R
APWM_R+/- DVD_A_OUT_R
HA0~A19,
HD0~D15,
MEMCS0, RD, WR
SD_A0~A11
64M SDRAM
FLASH 16M SD_D0~D15 IC4005
IC4007 M12L64164A-7TG
SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE
RAMDQM, CLK, CKE, WE#,
CAS#, CS0#, CS1#, RAS#
SD_BA0, DQM
F-1 F-2
POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM
TRANSFORMER
L501 T501
CD501 J501 D510
F501
4 3 1 12 D515 CP501__5.6. AT+12V
AC IN
2 1
D518 C502 3 11 D523 CP501__7.8.9. AT+5.8V
+
DC-DC CONVERTER
D505 5 8 IC503
LA5797M-TE-L-E
6
1 7 CP501__4.P.CON+32
Q501 Q505 CP501__21. POWER FAIL

POWER CONTROL IC
IC501 FA5531P-A2 7 SOUND AMP
1 ZCD VH 8 IC301
FEED BACK
1 LA42052-E
2 F 7 NC IC505 REGULATOR
PS2561AL1-1-V(W) IC502 KIA431A-AT
3 IS Vcc 6
CP501__2.FILTER_MUTE
4 GN OUT 5 4 1
3 2 3 1
CP501__20.INVERTER_H
CP501__19.LIGHT_CTL
T7001 5 CD7005__14.HV
DRIVE 6 CD7005__7.LV
1
Q7005
7 CD7005__8.LV
17
4 8 CD7005__1.HV
18
10
20 8
5 CD7005__14.HV
1 1
16 6 CD7005__7.LV
11 DRIVE
9 4 7 CD7005__8.LV
Q7004
T7002 8 CD7005__1.HV
INVERTER
CONTROLLER
IC7001 DRIVE
Q7003
1 6
BD9882FV-E2
7 2
8 9
4
FEED_BACK
IC7002 LM2902DR
F-3 F-4
POWER(DIGITAL PCB) BLOCK DIAGRAM
5.0V REGULATOR 5.0V

IC3007
BD7820FP-E2
3.3V REGULATOR
IC3009
CP3001 S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG
1
2 FILTER MUTE AT3.3V
3 DIGITAL TUNER
4 TUNER+30V TU5801
5 ENG36E18KRF
AT+12V
6 SUB MICON EEPROM
7 IC6202 IC2805
8 AT+5.8V R5F21124FP M24256-BWMN6TP
9
10
11
12 BTSC DEMODULATOR AUDIO ADC
13 IC5801 IC6551
14 AN5832SA-E1V AK5358A
15
16 VDD CORE 1V
17 IC3001 1V
18 BD9130NV SCALER IC
19 LIGHT_CTL IC2801
20 INVERTER_H R8J66954BG
21 POWER FAIL
22 KEY_B
23 KEY_A
VDD CORE 3.3V

IC3002
AL1015
SW FLASH IC 1.8V REGULATOR DDR SDRAM
IC2804 IC3003 1.8V IC2802
EN29LV320AB-70TCP PQ035ZN1HZPH HYB18TC256160BF-3S
LCD+B SW LCD PANEL
Q3009 V2801
RTQ035P02-TR T220SW01_V0
AUDIO Lch SW AUDIO Rch SW AUDIO Lch SW AUDIO Lch SW

IC6552 IC6553 IC6557 IC6558
NJM2534V(TE2) NJM2534V(TE2) NJM2534V(TE2) NJM2534V(TE2)
F-5 F-6
SIGNAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
HEADPHONE JACK
J301
PJ-364H
OUT
COAXIAL
J4301
RCH-101HT(OR) SPEAKER L/R
SP301, SP302
NB073N1-B1
COMPONENT Y SPDIF
AMP L/R
COMPONENT IN
COMPONENT U
IN J8102
AUDIO L/R SOUND AMP IC
RCA-341H(NI)-09
COMPONENT V IC301
LA42052-E
AV 1 CVBS
CVBS _AV_IN
AV1_A_IN_L
J8104
IN RCA-341H(2)NI-06
AV1_A_IN_R AUDIO Lch SW IC
IC6557 AUDIO Lch SW IC AUDIO L
NJM2534V(TE2) IC6552
AV 2/YUV AUDIO_L NJM2534V(TE2) LCD PANEL
COMPONENT AUDIO IN LVDS DATA/CLK
IN V2801
J8103
T220SW01_V0
RCA-228H(3)NI-02
AV 2/YUV AUDIO_R
AUDIO Rch SW IC AUDIO R AUDIO ADC IC AUDIO DATA
PC/DVI AUDIO L AUDIO Rch SW IC IC6553 IC6551
IN PC/DVI AUDIO IN IC6558 NJM2534V(TE2) AK5358A
J4302 PC/DVI AUDIO R NJM2534V(TE2)
PJ-364H
SCALER IC
Y SW IC2801
IC6554 R8J66954BG
TUNER AUDIO L MM1501XNRE C SW
BTSC DEMODULATOR IC SW_C_IN
IC6555
IC5801 TUNER AUDIO R MM1501XNRE PC R
SIF AN5832SA -E1V PC IN
PC G CP4303 IN
TUNER
DIGITAL RF (IF) WD-00021-R
IN TU5801
PC B
ENG36E18KRF
ANALOG RF(CVBS)
S VIDEO IN AV1_Y SW_Y_IN

IN J8101 AV1_C
DIN-417HA-01
DVD CP3002
18 RX
7 TX
13 DVD_A_OUT_R
DIGITAL_A_SW
14 DVD_A_OUT_L
1 SPDIF-134 IC6556
15 [Y]VIDEO SN74LVC1G3157DCKR
16 [U]C_VIDEO
6 START_SW SUB MICON
4 DVD_RESET IC6202
2 ZERO R5F21124FP
F-7 F-8
DVD MT (TOP SIDE) DVD MT (BOTTOM SIDE)
MOTOR
R2306
R2318
C2337
C2332 R2355 C2323 C2326 R2341
B2305
B4016
R2309 W813
Q2302
Q2301
C2335
C2331 R2340
C2327 CP2301_1 C2329 C2339 C2338 C2309 C2317
CP2302 R2350 C2321 B2304 W812
C2336 C4059
C2340 R2353 C2350
C2316 R4019 R4043
C2348
B4002 R4018 R4022
C4015
C2341
R2325
C2333
R2360 C4070 C2334 R2332
C4058 C2328 C4075 C4076
REGULATOR
C2319 R2307
C4006
C4002 R2319 B4003 R2333
R4062 R4023
R2330
R2305 C4071 R2342
R2337
CP2303 C4086 C4004 C4055 C4057 C4033
C4085 R2327 R2349 R2324 R4002 R4061
C2360
C4010
C2358
C4008
1 157 R4001 R2352 C4037 R2335 R2336 R4063 C4003
R2326 C2357 R2328 W807 R4003
C2307 C4011 C4001 C4056 C4095
R2329
R2323
C4007
R2310
C2306 R4004 R2334 R4060
C4062 C4064
C4034 C2359 C2330 R2358
C8510 R4005
W836 R2321 R2357
X4001
R4086
IC2301
C4021
C2305
C8511
L8504
R4012 R2304 C8517
MPEG
R2320 C2304 R2313 C4028 R4045
C4091
R4042 C2303
R2302 C4079 R4078 C4060 C4039
C4035 R2303 D2303 IC4007
C2365 C8512 R4089
C2302
R2338
C8515 B8501 D2304 C4051 R4052 C4027 W860
IC4001
R2301
C4005 R4065
C2315
C2301 R2339
R2308
R4040
B4001
C4096
C8502
C2310 R4087
L8501
B4015 R4016 C4054
C4044 C4052 R4032 C4081
B4010
C4053
R8530
L8502
C8518
C4105
C8504
D4002
R8532
D4003
C4069 C8503 C4032
R4067
C4014
C8505
R8534 C8519 B8502 R4024
R8528
C8501 R8508 R4014 W841
R4071 C8532
D4005
C8539
C8534 R8509 R8507 C8506 R4048
C8530
C4012 C8513
CP8502
C8527 C8528
R8506 R8537 C4049
C8526
R8517 R4036 C4040 C4041
C4016 R8521 C8521 R4037
IC8502
C4042
C4078 IC8501
R8523 R8516 R4038
R4039
B8504
C8529
105 R8522 C8533 R4054 R4053
53
C8538
R8539
W825
D4008
C4013 R8533 B8503
R4009 R8527 C8516 C4077
W818
C8531
R4008
C4029
C4022
C8520
C4020
R8535
C8541
C4024 W824 IC4005
C4019
C4018 C4023 C4025 C4030 R8529 C8543 R8536

C4026
R8510
R8531
C4082
C4038 C8525 C8537 C8536

C4072
C8544
C8514
D8510
C4099
C4009
C4067
C4083 B4006 C8542 DMG097A
C4050
B4005
B4008 C4036 C4045 C4046 C4047

CP8501
DMG097A 4
NTSC PAL
G-1 G-2
G-3
W856
R3039
L6561
R3038
CP4301 W857 CP3001
D3402
D3403
W812
C6564
W840
W861
B3011
B3012
R6582 R6588
Q3411
Q3410
B3009
B3010
C4323 R6581 R6586 C6575
C4318
C4313
C4317
IC6554
Q3002
R3003
C6580 C6579
R3004
W851
C3022
C6574
C6577
C6576 W850
IC6555 L3005
Q3001
R4334
REGULATOR
R4340 W867 IC6558 IC6557
W847
W849
R4344 C3043
R4332
R4305
L3004
W871 C6571 C6570 C3013
R4304
CP4303
AV SW
IC6553 IC6552 R3031
R4303
C3038
L3001
CP3002
IC3007
R3033 R3032
C3065 C3066
B3022 B3023
R3034
JACK
B3003
C3054
D3007
D3005
IC3009
R3037
C3055
C3027
C3026
C3024
B3013
R4318 R3018
B3016
C4312 C2802 C2882
R3016
J4302
C4314 C2883 C2877 C2974 C2869 C2876
R4319
X3601
X2801
C2806
X2802
R3618
C2923
B2810
R3643
R3612
Q3610
SCALER
B2820
C2811
C2810
C2809
C3618
C2891 NR2813
C3615
NR2812 C2975 C2867 C2866
C3611
B2811
C2812
C3610
R3603 R3635
Q3603
R2812
R2814
R2811
R2810
R2806
R3604 C2808
R2816
R2871
R3632
R3602
R3641
R2813
R2815
R3621 C3614 C2880

D3601 C2921
R3619 R3634
B2821
Q3608 Q3607
R3631 R3630
D3602
A1
NR2811
A21
NR2810
R2800
L3603
R2830 R2846 C2965
CP3602
IC2801
C2959 R2850
C2937 C2946
L3604
C2940
C2932
C2931
NTSC
C2933
C2905 C2944
C2936
C2943
C2947
A9
C2924
A1
C2939
CP2804
NR2806
B2822
AA1
C2918
AA21
C2935 C2945
B2816
B2815
W915
R2823
B2817
B2813
C2929 R2837
IC2802
C2914
C5855
R2826
R2817
R2825
R2842
R2840
R1
R9
C2948
R2839
R2838
R2827
NR2808 NR2807 R2824
R5823
J4301 C5847
DIGITAL (TOP SIDE)
B2800
B6553
R5818
R5817
R5821
B6552
R5822
B6554 R2820
Q5804
C6557 L5805
C5846
C3023
R6558
B4301
R6562 C6561 Q5803
C4302 R6561 C6562 C5803 C2860

R6559
C5844 R5819
C5845 R5820
C3047
W878
R5802
TUNER
R5801 R5807
R5816
R5815
C5819 C5801
CEG360A
R5803
C5822
L5801 C5820 C3048

C5821 R5804
L3003
C5814
3
TU5801
X6201
C2807
C6213 C6215
C6212
R6221
C6216 R6225
R6216
R6213 R6223 R6224
R6206 R6228
R6227
R6215
R6214
R6205 R6219
W862 C6205
CP2803
W864
CP6201
CP2801
MICON
C2968
R2856
IC2805
C6221 B6201
R6235
R6231
W914
B6202
D6209
D6212
R6233
CD6203 CD6202
G-4
G-5
Q6203
Q6204
C5818 R5813
C5824 R6220
C5823 C5833
C5825 C5834 R6222
C5835
Q5802
C5826
C6210
Q6201 Q6202
R5808 R5810 C6218
C5837
25
R5809 R5812 17
C5838 R6226
R6212
R6211
IC5801
C5827 C5839 IC6202 R6236
R5811
R6210
C5840 1
9
R6209
Q5801
C5841
C5830
D6205
R6217
R6204
IC6201
C6209 R6203
C5817
C5804
C5809
C5810
C5811
C5812
R6551 B5804 B5803 B5802
C5805
R6552 C2836 D3003
C2831
R3007
IC6556
B6551
C5806 B5801
C4301
R4301 R6566
R4306 C2976 IC3003
C6554
R4302 C2977 R6567
C4303 R6563
Q4301
C2951
C2838
R4307
IC6551
R4309
R6560
C4304
C2840
R6569
NR6551
R4310 C6555 C6559

R3013
W884
C3018
C6556 C6560 X6551
C2950
B4302
C4306
R3015 R3017
W881
R2857
R2841 R2853 C2925
C2822 C2815
NR2809 C2813
R5825
C5853
R5824
CEG360A
C2849 C2855
C2949
C2824
C2842
C2841
C2846 C2853
C2821 C2826
R2818 R2819
C2814
R2874
C2816
C2909 C2913
C2912
NR2805
C5852
C2847 C2857
C2926 C2908
C2819
C2817
C2920 C2843 C2861

C2858
C2856
C2818
C2825
C2911 R2829
C2823
R2828
C2820
C2907
C2854
C2897
C2906 C2851
C2895
C2889
C2896 C2901
C2934 C2910
C2844 C2850
C2938 C2852
C2941
C2903
C2848
C2859
C2893 C2919 C2942
C3612 R3629 C2872

C2845 C2892 C2888
C2917
C2871
IC3602
C2904
C2879
C2927
DIGITAL (BOTTOM SIDE)
R2836
C2900 C2922 C2902 C2898
C2894
C2885 C2890
C2899 C2884 C2887
C2886 C2875
R3610 C2874 C2881

R3614
R3616
C3613
B2803
R2835 C2868
R2809
R2808
R3633 C3616
C3605
B2807 B2804
B3601
R2807
D3611
D3607
R2805
C3603
NR2802
R2849
R2847
IC2804
C2803
B2806
R4316 B2809 B2808 B2805
NR2803 NR2804
B4303
R3005 B2812
B4304
NR2801
C3015
W852W853
R4317 R3009
R2802
B2801 W832
IC3001
R3008 L3002
C3016
R6585 R6583
D3002
C3056
C3029
C3031
R3434
R3433
D3006
R6578
R6580 R6579 C6567 B3008
B3014
C3002 C3004
Q3009
C6583
R3002 C3003 C3039
R3010 R3023
C6563 R3025 R3024
Q3005
W842 R3019
Q3004
C6566 C6565
R4343
IC3002
C3017
R6572 R6573 Q3011
C3012
C3042
C3011
Q3003
R6556 R6555 C6551

W844
R3020
R3022
C6584 C6553 C3019 C3014

R4346
Q3010
R3040
C3041
C3021
B3005
B3004
Q3006
R3043
C4319
R3014
R3035
C4320
B3015 R3042
C6568 B6556 C3040 D3004
C6581 B3006 R3045
W846 R6590 R6587 R6584 C6569 R3413 B3007
Q3402
Q3007
R3041
R6589
R4330
R4329
R4347
R3412
Q3008
D3401
B3017
R3427
R3405
Q3404
C3413 R3421
Q3409
R3431
Q3407
R3428
G-6
POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON (INSERTED PARTS)
SW
SOLDER SIDE
SOLDER SIDE
CD2301
SW2
SW2208
SW2202
SW2207
SW2205
SW2201
SW2204
SW2206
CP2201
CEG363A
C507
CD7005
W031 FH502
DED020A
WH
BR
YE
GR
CD7006
SW2203
F501
W013
C506
M2602 M2601
C7030
CP7601
T7001
R7049 AS MARKED.
C7602
R7050 - REPLACE W810
C7033
C7026
RISK OF FIRE
D7018
C7029
W023
D7015
C7022
W029
FH501
R7051
W020
C7020 W808 OS7601
D504
R7052
J501
W019
W024
D505
D7010
C7018
C7017
R7039
R7038
T7002 C510
D7006
C508
W828
D7008 L501
R7036_1
TH501_1
C7006
Q7004 Q7005 R504

D7601
C502
HS503
D7004 R512
R7024
R503
C5
D7003 D515
D510
R509
18
CEG364A
W028
D7002 R7035 R51
D508
0
D518
D507
D7001
D7005
W807
R7043
C7023
W012 W006
C7021
R7042
W819 HS501
R309
R308
C525
W001
R7023
D523
W005
D7009 Q501
D512
W821
R7022
R7027
W002
R310
R311
R7028
B501
D7007 L7001
13
C5
R518
R7029
T501_1
J301
R505_1
R7056
D514
R521
HS502
C517
J8102
R507
R7014
R7011
W011
CD301
D511
W836 W004
C504
D506 J8103
W010
R511
IC505
C
51
J8101
D516
4
C307
R501
C520
C310
IC501
C511_1
C523_1
W815
W018 W017
W027
R7004 C516
C309
C311
W014
W026
IC502 J8104
C522
W025
R551
Q504 W804
W835
C512 W016 HS301 IC301

Q503 L504 C304
L503
R314
R302
W806 S803X
W021
W022
W822
W032
W008
C535
D517
CP501 CP8101
CEG362A
R535
R529
R7001
R538
S803Y
G-7 G-8
G-9
W827
W839
R7602
R7603
R7604 W803
R7605
W824
CEG364A
R8120 C8104
R8103 R8117
C8102 C8111
W823 B308 B307 R8116
R8114
R8119 C8106
C8107
C8105 R8113
W820
R8105
R8104 R8111 R8115
C8103 R8112 C8108
B303 R8118 R8106
C8109
C8110
R8108 R8107
R8110
C320 C319
R307
R544
R306
R506
R304
R305
R502
C308
C301
R545
D301 C306
R546
R2201
R2205
R2204
R547 C305
C303
Q302
R313
CEG363A
C7028
Q301
D7012
R7048 D509
C509_1
C503
D7022 C501
SOLDER SIDE
C505
D7026
R513
D7021
D7025
D7016
R2202
R2206
R7047
R517
R2203 C526
C521
R524
R525
R515 R523
R519
C7027
C543_1
D7011
R543
D521
C546
D522 R536
R533
POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON (CHIP MOUNTED PARTS)
D7013 C539
CEG362A
C7032
C538
IC503
F7001
C545 C531
D519
D520
C7011
R531
C7012
Q505
D7020 R7009
R7046 R7033 R7012 R7020
D7024 C7015 C7004 C7008
R7034 R7010
D7023 C7009
IC7001
R7007
D7019 C7013 C7010
C7034 R7013
R7021 R7017
R7053 R7030
C7035 R7018
R7032 C7002
Q7003
C7025 R7054 C7016 C7003

R7019
R7026
R7037
IC7002
R7006
R7044 R7041 R7025 C7007 C7001

C7024
C7014
R7045 R7040
C7019
R7002
R7005
R7003
R7008
C7031
D7014 D7017
G-10
A B C D E F G H
MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (DVD MT PCB)

8 8
FOCUS_PWM
TRACK_PWM
SLED_PWM
SPDL_SENS+
SPINDLE_PWM
(VR_CD)MD_DVD
(VR_DVD) MD_CD
SPDL_SENS-
OPU_D
OPU_C
OPU_E
OPU_B
OPU_A
DVD_LD
OPU_F
CD_LD
VC
RF
JG001 C4038 0.01 B
JG002 VDDPWM
C4001 0.0039 B
C4056 0.027 B
0.027 B
C4057 180P CH
JG003 BOOT2
C4085 0.001 B
TACT_OFFSET
FACT_OFFSET
R4019 4.7K
R4018 4.7K
JG004 BOOT1
JG005 D4005
DUPTD1
C4003
JG006 MA111 DUPRD1
JG007 DUPTD0 (D_GND)
390 +-1%
7 JG008 DUPRD0 (AFEGND) (RF_GND) 7
C4055 0.001 B
C4004 0.1 F
F
C4033
JG009 P.CON+5V_D (A_GND)
6.3V 47 SJV
6.3V 47 SJV
0.001 B
6.3V 47 SJV
C4058 0.001 B
0.01 B
0.1
10P CH
0.1 F
0.1 F
0.1 F
4.7K
4.7K
4.7K
4.7K
R4023
0.1 F
EBMS160808A102_RDC45
15K+-1% R4043
560P CH
SGND
4.7K
C4086
C4006
C4105
0.1 F
R4037
R4038
R4036
R4039
0.1 F
C4075
C4076
C4070
C4021
C4072
C4071
11K
11K
39K
15K
C4067
FROM/TO MOTOR DRIVE
RFINN
RFINP
VDDDAC B4002 EBMS160808A102_RDC45 (185mA)
C4015
C4002
C4059
R4060
R4061
R4062
R4063
VDDAFERF B4003 EBMS160808A102_RDC45 (120mA)
D4008 MA111
B4016
TIN
MEMCS0
R4022
V_SW
RD
HD9
HD1
HD8
HD0
HA0
TIN_SW
(21mA) TRAY_OPEN
B4005 EBMS160808A102_RDC45 (130mA) TRAY_CLOSE
+1.8V P.CON+3.3V_D VDDPWM3.3V
+3.3V B4001 (10mA)
4.7K
NC 0
NC 0
NC
0 NC
6 FROM/TO MEMORY 6
NC
NC
NC
NC
0 NC
0 NC
3.3
1.9
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.9
2.9
2.4
3.3
1.8
1.7
1.0
1.6
3.3
1.8
2.4
3.3
3.3
0.9
1.7
2.1
2.1
2.7
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3
3.3
2.3
2.3
3.3
1.6
1.6
C4007 0.1 F
0
GND
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
+3.3V R4001 390 +-1% (RF_GND)
R4045
208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157 GND
GNDPWM
VDDPWM
MEMADD(0)
2.4
DVD_MD
GNDREF
0
RESLOAD
HD2
GNDAFE
VDDSAFE
GND1AFE
CD_MD
GNDC
VDDAFE
VDDC
DVD_LD
GPIO(63)/MEMCS2#
CD_LD
GPIO(61)/FCU_IOWR#
VREF
105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156
GPIO(60)/FCU_SCLK
GPIO(56)/FCU_RST
VC
GPIO(53)/PWMCO(4)
GPIO(52)/PWMCO(3)
GPIO(51)/PWMCO(2)
GPIO(50)/PWMCO(1)
GPIO(49)/PWMCO(0)
G
GPIO(59)/FCU_CS2#
GPIO(58)/FCU_CS3#
HA0 MEMDAT(2)
D
C
GPIO(62)/FCU_IORD#
GPIO(57)/FCU_WAIT#
K
E
B
F
52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J
IGPIO(54)/PWMCO(5)
GNDDACBS2
IGPIO(55)/FCU_IRQ
HA1 HD10 2.4 1.3 DAC_VIDEO_C/D HOME
MEMDAT(10)/GPIO(0) RSET
HA2 HD3 2.2 1.3 TOUT_SW
MEMDAT(3) DAC1 W807 DVD_CD
HA3 HD11 2.2 3.3 DAC_VIDEO_D
HA4 MEMDAT(11)/GPIO(1) VDDDAC DAC_VIDEO_A DRVSB
HD4 1.7 1.2 RF
HA5 MEMDAT(4) DAC2 DAC_VIDEO_E
HA6 HD12 2.0 1.2 OPU_A
MEMDAT(12)/GPIO(2) DAC3
75 +-1%
75 +-1%
75 +-1%
75 +-1%
OPU_B
75 +-1%
R4086
HA7 HD5 2.2 3.3
R4005
R4004
R4002
MEMDAT(5)
R4003
HA8 VDDDAC OPU_C
HD13 1.2 1.1
HA9 MEMDAT(13)/GPIO(3) DAC4 OPU_D
HD6 1.9 0 OPU_E
HA10 MEMDAT(6) GNDDAC_D
HA11 HD14 1.5 1.1 OPU_F
MEMDAT(14)/GPIO(4) 208 VDDP 160 A DAC5
HA12 0 1.4 R4042 100 W836 VC
GNDC XIN C4034 27P CH SPDL_SENS-
HA13 HD7 2.5 207 GPIO(9)/MEMDAT(9) 159 VDD1AFE 1.6
MEMDAT(7) XO X4001 SPDL_SENS+
R4012
HA14 C4044
1M
HD15 1.9 158 RFN 1.8 100GT02727 MD_DVD
5 HA15
C4008 0.1 F
MEMDAT(15) 206 MEMDAT(1) VDDPLL 52 5
6.3V 47
C4069
HA16 1.8 0 27MHz C4035 27P CH MD_CD
SJV
VDDC 157 RFP GNDPLL R4016 100P CH
HA17 C4010 0.1 F 3.3 205 GPIO(8)/MEMDAT(8) 3.3 C4028 0.1 F C4079 0.001 B RESET DVD_LD
VDDP RESET# CD_LD
HA18 HA16 2.5 0
MEMADD(16) 204 MEMDAT(0) GNDC 100 SPINDLE_PWM
HA19
3.3 1.8 R4078 4.7K C4051 0.1 F C4091 100P CH SLED_PWM
NC MEMCS1#/GPIO(5) VDDC
HA15 0.7 203 MEMRD# 3.3 DUPRD1 TRACK_PWM
HD0 MEMADD(15) GPIO(48)/DUPRD1
HD1 HA14 0.6 3.3 R4089 4.7K DUPTD1 FOCUS_PWM
MEMADD(14) 202 MEMCS0# GPIO(47)/DUPTD1
HD2 HA13 0.6 3.3 D4002 MA111 DUPRD0
HD3 MEMADD(13) GPIO(46)/DUPRD0
HA12 1.0 3.3 C4027 0.01 B D4003 MA111 DUPTD0
HD4 MEMADD(12) GPIO(45)/PWMCO(5)/DUPTD0
HD5 HA11 2.5 3.3 C4005 56P CH
MEMADD(11) VDDP R4052 4.7K
HD6 HA10 0.7 3.3 IRRCV JG029
MEMADD(10) IGPIO(44)
HD7 HA9 1.0 3.3 R4065 4.7K
HD8 MEMADD(9) GPIO(43)/TDO SSCTXD
HA8 2.4 3.3 R4087 4.7K
HD9 MEMADD(8) GPIO(42)/TCK SSCCLK
HD10 WR 3.3 MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP IC 3.3 R4032 4.7K R4067 10K C4053
MEMWR# GPIO(41)/TDI/NMI SSCRXD
HD11 HA18 0 0
68P CH
68P CH
68P CH
MEMADD(18)/GPIO(6) IC4001 GPIO(40) 0.001 B TIN
HD12 HA17 2.8 0
4 MEMADD(17) ZR36966ELCG-D GPIO(39) C4096 0.001 B 4
HD13 B4015
HA7 1.7 3.3 (DVD-L/CD-H) DVD_CD
(D_GND)
HD14 MEMADD(7) GPIO(38)
HD15 HA6 0 3.3 EBMS160808A102_RDC45 (MUTE-L) C4032 DRVSB
MEMADD(6) IGPIO(37)/TMS/NMI
C4049
C4052
C4054
0 0 TOUT_SW
GNDC GPIO(36) 0.001 B
MEMCS0 HA5 1.7 0 C4011 100P CH TRAY_CLOSE
MEMADD(5) 110 GNDAPWM GPIO(35) FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO
RD 100 APWM6+/GPIO(14) TRAY_OPEN
HA4 1.7 3.3 C4081 0.1 F
WR MEMADD(4) GPIO(34)/RAMCKE/SPDIFIN C4037 100P CH
HA3 1.7 101 APWM6-/GPIO(15) 111 IGPIO(23)/APWM2+ 3.3 R4024 HOME
SD_A0 MEMADD(3) 53 RAMADD(0) GPIO(33)/AIN/SPDIFIN 4.7K
SD_A1 C4014 0.1 F 3.3 1.6 B4010 R4071 150 SPDIF
VDDP 102 APWM5+/GPIO(16) 112 GPIO(24)/AOUT(2)/APWM2- GPIO(32)/SPDIFO SYS_MUTE
SD_A2 54 RAMADD(8)
HA2 1.0 0 NC EBMS160808A102_RDC45 DAC_VIDEO_A
SD_A3 MEMADD(2) 113 GPIO(25)/APWM1+ GPIO(31)/ABCLK 54
HA1 2.6 55 RAMADD(10) 103 APWM5-/GPIO(17) 0 NC DAC_VIDEO_C/D
SD_A4 MEMADD(1) GPIO(30)/ALRCLK C4012
SD_A5 HA19 0 104 AIN/SPDIFIN/GPIO(18) 3.3 RESET
MEMADD(19)/IGPIO(7) 56 VDDP VDDP
SD_A6 3.3 0 SPDIF
USBVDD GPIO(29)/AMCLK NC 0.01 B
SD_A7 105 VDDAPWM DUPRD1
0
SD_A8 0 NC USBDP/GPO(67) GNDC DUPTD1
106 GPIO(19)/PWMCO(5)/APWM4+ 104PIN FPCSTRB 1.6 APWM_L-
SD_A9 0 NC USBDN/GPO(68) GPIO(28)/AOUT(0)/APWM0- APWM_L+
SD_A10 0 1.6 APWM_L+ APWM_L-
USBGND 107 GPIO(20)/APWM4- FOR PLAYER GPIO(27)/APWM0+
3 SD_A11 SD_A4 1.6 1.6 APWM_R- APWM_R+ 3
RAMADD(4) GPIO(26)/AOUT(1)/APWM1-
SD_D0 APWM_R-
RAMDQM2/RAMCKE/GPO(66)
SD_A3 1.6 108 GPIO(21)/APWM3+ 1.6 APWM_R+

RAMCKE/SDI_PSC/GPIO(10)
SD_D1 RAMADD(3) P.CON+1.8V_D

SD_A5 1.6 0
SD_D2 RAMADD(5) 109 GPIO(22)/AOUT(3)/APWM3- NC P.CON+3.3V_D
C4016 0.1 F 3.3 0
RAMADD(11)/GPO(64)
SD_D3 VDDIP 94PIN STBY_L NC P.CON+5V_D

SD_D4 0 0
RAMCS1#/GPO(65)
APWM7+/GPIO(12)
APWM7-/GPIO(13)
GNDC FOR PLAYER

GPAIO/IGPIO(11)
SD_D5 SD_A2 0.7 0 NC GND

SD_D6 RAMADD(2)
GND
RAMDAT(10)
RAMDAT(11)
RAMDAT(12)
RAMDAT(13)
RAMDAT(14)
RAMDAT(15)
SD_A6 1.6 3.3

RAMADD(9)
RAMDAT(8)
RAMDAT(7)
RAMDAT(9)
RAMDAT(6)
RAMDAT(5)
RAMDAT(4)
RAMDAT(3)
RAMDAT(2)
RAMDAT(1)
RAMDAT(0)
SD_D7 RAMADD(6)
0 NC
RAMRAS#
RAMCAS#
GNDPCLK
RAMCS0#
VDDPCLK
RAMDQM
SD_A1 1.2
RAMWE#
SD_D8 RAMADD(1) NC
RAMBA
GNDC
GNDC
GNDC
GNDC
GNDC
SD_D9 SD_A7 1.6 0 NC

VDDC
VDDP
VDDP
VDDP
VDDP
PCLK
RAMADD(7) R4009
SD_D10 C4013 0.1 F 1.8 3.3 C4026 0.1 F
SD_D11 VDDC
SD_D12 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 33
C4042
0.1 F
SD_D13
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1.0
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
1.9
0.5
3.3
1.8
1.3
1.2
1.2
3.3
1.0
1.2
2.3
1.7
1.8
2.2
3.3
1.7
0.8
1.8
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.3
3.3
3.3
1.0
3.3
NC NCNC NCNC
SD_D14 R4054 NC NC NC
0
0
0
0
SD_D15 B4006 (250mA)

C4078 6.3V 47 SJV
RAMCS0# 1K
0.01 B
C4029 100P CH
0.1 F
0.1 F
RAMCS1# R4053
0.1 F
F
0.1 F
0.1 F
TP4010
2 2
47
RAMRAS#
6.3V 220 SJV
4.7K
6.3V 100 SJV

C4077 0.1 F
0.1
RAMCAS# 1K
C4082
0.1 F
C4030
C4083
SD_BA0
C4024
C4025
C4018
C4019
RAMDQM
C4023
C4020
R4008
C4022
R4014
RAMWE#
RAMCLK
(D_GND)
RAMCKE
W841
PCB130
DMG097
SYS_MUTE
RAMCS0#
RAMRAS#
RAMCS1#
RAMWE#
RAMCKE
RAMDQM
RAMCAS#
RAMCLK
SD_BA0
SD_A10
SD_A11
SD_D8
SD_D1
SD_D10
SD_D11
SD_D12
SD_D14
SD_D15
SD_A0
SD_A8
SD_D7
SD_D9
SD_D6
SD_D5
SD_D4
SD_D3
SD_D2
SD_D0
SD_D13
SD_A9
1 1
53
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.
A B C D E F G H
H-1 H-2
A B C D E F G H
MEMORY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DVD MT PCB) 8
FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP
SD_A0
SD_A1 FLASH IC 16M
SD_A2
SD_A3 IC4007 SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE
SD_A4
HA16 2.5 0.7 HA15
SD_A5
48
A16 A15
1
SD_A6
SD_A7 C4064 3.3 0.6 HA14
SD_A8
47
VCCQ A14
2
SD_A9 0.1 F
SD_A10 64M SDRAM IC
0 0.6 HA13 IC4005 M12L64164A-7TG
SD_A11
46
VSS A13
3
7 SD_D0 C4036 7
SD_D1 0 3.3
54
VSS VDD
1
HD15 1.9 1.0 HA12
SD_D2
45
DQ15 A12 0.001 B
4
SD_D3 SD_D15 1.2 1.3 SD_D0
53
DQ15 DQ0
2
SD_D4 C4050
HD7 2.5 2.5 HA11 0 3.3
SD_D5
44
52
DQ7 A11 VSSQ VDDQ
3
SD_D6 0.01 B
SD_D7 SD_D14 1.2 1.2 SD_D1
51
DQ14 DQ1
4
HD14 1.5 0.7 HA10
SD_D8
43
DQ14 A10
6
SD_D9 SD_D13 1.7 0.8 SD_D2
50
DQ13 DQ2
5
SD_D10 C4040
HD6 1.9 1.0 HA9 3.3 0
SD_D11
42
49
DQ6 A9 VDDQ VSSQ
6
SD_D12 0.01 B
SD_D13 SD_D12 1.8 2.2 SD_D3
48
DQ12 DQ3
7
HD13 1.2 2.4 HA8
SD_D14
41
DQ13 A8
8
SD_D15 SD_D11 2.3 1.7 SD_D4
47
DQ11 DQ4
8
RAMCS0# 0 C4045
HD5 2.2 HA19 0 3.3
RAMCS1#
40
46
DQ5 A19 VSSQ VDDQ
9
6 RAMRAS# 0.1 F 6
RAMCAS# 0 SD_D10 1.0 1.2 SD_D5
45
10
2.0 DQ10 DQ5
SD_BA0 HD12
39
10
DQ12 A20 NC 1.2 1.2
RAMDQM SD_D9 SD_D6
44
11
DQ9 DQ6
RAMWE# C4041
HD4 1.7 3.3 WR 3.3 0
RAMCLK
38
11
43
12
DQ4 WE# VDDQ VSSQ
RAMCKE C4060 330P CH 0.01 B
C4062 SD_D8 1.8 1.3 SD_D7
42
13
3.3 0 DQ8 DQ7
RESET
37
12
VDD RP# 0 3.3 C4046
0.1 F
41
14
VSS VDD
HA0 3.3
2.2 C4039 0 1.9 0.1 F
HA1 HD11 RAMDQM
36
13
40
15
DQ11 VPP NC NC LDQM
HA2
0.1 F 1.8 3.3
HA3 3.3 RAMDQM RAMWE#
39
16
2.2 UDQM WE
HA4 HD3
35
14
DQ3 WP# 0.5 3.3
HA5 RAMCLK RAMCAS#
38
17
CLK CAS
HA6
2.4 0 W860 R4048 3.3 3.3
HA7 HD10 W860 HA19 55 RAMRAS#
34
15
37
18
DQ10 A19 CKE RAS
HA8
5 8M FLASH 4.7K 0 3.3 5
HA9 RAMCS1#
36
19
2.4 0 NC NC CS
HA10 HD2 HA18
33
16
DQ2 A18 0 0
HA11 SD_A11 SD_BA0
35
20
A11 BA0
HA12
HA13 HD9 1.9 2.8 HA17 SD_A9 0 3.3 RAMCS0#
32
17
34
21
DQ9 A17 A9 BA1
HA14
HA15 SD_A8 0 0 SD_A10
33
22
1.5 1.7 A8 A10/AP
HA16 HD1 HA7
31
18
DQ1 A7 1.6 1.0
HA17 SD_A7 SD_A0
32
23
A7 A0
HA18
HA19 HD8 1.5 0 HA6 SD_A6 1.6 1.2 SD_A1
30
19
31
24
DQ8 A6 A6 A1
HD0
HD1 SD_A5 1.6 0.7 SD_A2
30
25
1.5 1.7 A5 A2
HD2 HD0 HA5
29
20
DQ0 A5 1.6 1.6
HD3 SD_A4 SD_A3
29
26
A4 A3
HD4
2.9 1.7 0 3.3 C4047
HD5 RD HA4
28
21
28
27
DE# A4 VSS VDD
HD6
0.1 F
HD7 RAMCKE
4 HD8 0 1.7 HA3 4
27
22
VSS A3
HD9
HD10
HD11 MEMCSO 2.9 1.0 HA2
26
23
CE# A2
HD12
HD13
HD14 HA0 2.4 25 2.6 HA1
24
A0 A1
HD15
MEMCS0
R4040
4.7K
RD
WR
+3.3V
B4008
FROM AUDIO/VIDEO
6.3V 220 SJV

3 3
C4095
C4009
1 B
0.01 B
C4099
P.CON+3.3V_D
D_GND
GND
RESET
MEMCS0
2 2
PCB130
DMG097
1 1
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.
A B C D E F G H
H-3 H-4
A B C D E F G H
MOTOR DRIVE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DVD MT PCB) 8
DVD_CD
MD_DVD
(VR_DVD)
DVD_LD
MD_CD
VC
(VR_CD)
CD_LD
R2360
33
C2350 C2328
DSM2(06SD) 0.1 B 6.3V 22 SJV
C2348 0.1 B
FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP
C2329
FROM/TO LOADER
6.3V 22 SJV MD_DVD
CP2301_1 MD_CD
7 LD07T2-24ND-03 DVD_CD
7
C2331 0.1 B
1 GND DVD_LD
R2355
C2333 33P CH JG015 OPU_F
3.3K
2 F CD_LD
JG012 OPU_VREF RF
3 Vref (RF_GND)
JG026 GND
4 VCC
(D_GND) OPU_A
JG014 OPU_E
5 E
OPU_B
C2323
C2334 33P CH JG013 OPU_D
0.1 B
6 D OPU_C
6.3V 47 SJV
C2335 33P CH JG040 OPU_C W813
7 C OPU_D
F
C2332
C2316
C2336 33P CH JG025 DVD_CD OPU_E
8 SW1(DVD/CD)
0.1
JG016 RF OPU_F
9 VRF(RF_OUT)
C2337 33P CH JG011 OPU_B VC
10 B B2304
RF_A5V P.CON+A5V_D HOME
C2338 33P CH JG010 OPU_A
11 A EBMS160808A102_RDC45 TOUT_SW
JG027 DVD/VR W812
6 12 VR(DVD) P.CON+3.3V_D TIN_SW 6
13 VR COM FOCUS_PWM
0.1 F
0.1 F
C2309
C2317
JG034 TRACK_PWM
14 VR(CD)
VDDPWM3.3V
15 GND
DRVSB
JG035 CDLD
6.3V 22 SJV
16 LD(CD) SPINDLE_PWM
FOCUS_PWM
C2327
C2326
0.1 F
17 PD/GND JG036 TRAY_CLOSE
R2336
390
JG037 DVDLD TRACK_PWM
18 LD(DVD) TRAY_OPEN
TP2320
JG017 JG018 R2339
R2334
19 GND JG056 R2306 SPDL_SENS+
10K
1.2K
20 NC NC 6.8 SPDL_SENS-
TR+ TP2309
21 T DRV R2318
TR- TP2310 DVD LD CTL SLED_PWM
22 T RTN 2.6 6.8
100 +-1%
FO+ TP2311 Q2301
R2309
23 F DRV KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P 1.9 R2332 R2313
R2324
FO- TP2312
1K
24 F RTN
5 4.7K 5
R2335
220
3.3K
2.3 C2340
R2301
R2310
R2307
75K
DVDLD
1K
TP2307
TP2305
R2319
6.3V 47 SJV 4.7K
33K
TP2303
TP2322
CDLD
CP2302 VC2
TP2304 C2341
R2308
04_6232_105_015_800+
10K
R2352
R2327
FROM AUDIO/VIDEO
TP2319
TP2318
TIN_SW
R2326
6.3V 47 SJV R2320
4.7K
5 CLOSE
5.6K
C2330
R2321
R2305
15K
100
27K
4 OPEN 0 4.7K
R2353 10P CH R2333 P.CON+A5V_D
3 GND(D) TOUT_SW 3.0
CD LD CTL
P.CON+3.3V_D
2 LD- 100 Q2302 220
KTA1544T-RTK/P P.CON+6V_D
1 LD+ 3.2 R2340 R2338
TP2308
100P CH
C2321
6.8 4.7K 0 4.1 3.2 3.2 1.6 0 NC 1.6 1.6 0 NC 1.6 0 NC 0 NC 0 0 0 NC 1.6 1.6 0 NC 1.8 1.6 1.6 0 NC (D_GND)
R2337
R2350
MOT_LD- GND
10K
4.7K
MOT_LD+ 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23
R2341
VCONT
MUTE1
REG-OUT
TP2316
MUTE234
VREF-OUT
VO_OP
VIN+OP
4 4
S-GND
REG-IN
VIN4
VIN-OP
VIN2+
VREF-IN
JG019
VIN4-
VIN2-
VIN3
VIN2
VIN3-
NC
NC
NC
NC
100P CH
C2339
P.CON+3.3V_D 6.8
B2305
LA6565VR-TLM-E
R2330
MOTOR DRIVE IC
1K
R2342
4.7K
CP2303 TP2306
04_6232_106_015_800+
(D_GND)
VIN1+A
VIN1-A
PGND2
PGND1
6 SW(GND)
VCCS
VCC2
VCC1
FWD
VD3-
VD2-
VD1-
VLD+
VD4+
VD3+
VD2+
VD1+
VIN 1
R2349
REV
VLD-
VD4-
TP2317
NC
HOME
NC
5 LIMIT SW
IC2301
100 MOT_SLED-
4 SLD-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
3 SLD+ MOT_SLED+
0 0 6.0 0 NC 1.9 1.9 2.6 2.7 2.6 2.8 0 0 3.7 1.7 2.6 2.7 0 NC 6.0 6.0 1.6 1.6 1.6 R2325
2 SP1- MOT_SPDL-
MOT_SPDL+ 6.8K
1 SP1+
3 3
TP2313
TP2314
TP2315
R2328
100P CH
100P CH
C2360
C2358
16V 100 SJV

0.1 F
R2302 100 +-1%

4.7K
0.1 B
C2310
100P CH
C2319
C2306
C2301
0.1 F
C2315
100P CH
100P CH
C2365
C2357
C2359
0.1 F
M_GND
R2357 1K
C2302 0.1 B
R2358
0.022 B
MA111
MA111
D2303
C2304
D2304
C2305
0.1 B
R2303 2.2
120
TP2301
TP2302
C2303 0.1 B C2307 0.1 B
R2304 2.2 JG057
R2323
R2329
2 2
1.2
1.2
JG058
TRAY_CLOSE
TRAY_OPEN
MOT_SPDL+
MOT_SLED+
MOT_SPDL-
MOT_SLED-
MOT_LD+
MOT_LD-
FO+
TR+
FO-
TR-
PCB130
DMG097
1 CAUTION:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY ARE ATTENTION:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS 1
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES DURING PLAYBACK.
A B C D E F G H
H-5 H-6
A B C D E F G H
AUDIO/VIDEO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DVD MT PCB) 8
FROM/TO REGULATOR
CP8502 (CP3002)
A2001WV2-8P
GND(M) 8
B8501
P.CON+6V_D P.CON+6V 7
16V 100 SJV

BLM18PG121SN1D
0.001 B
P.CON+A5V 6
0.1 B
C8515
C8518
C8517
GND 5
B8504
FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP P.CON+12V 4
7 M_GND EBMS160808A102_RDC45 7
P.CON+3.3V 3
DAC_VIDEO_C/D C8505 P.CON+5V_D
0.1 B
B C8521
DAC_C[U]C_VIDEO L8501 P.CON+3.3V 2
DAC_VIDEO_C/D P.CON+A5V_D B8502
0.001 B
C8539
12P CH GND 1
59 2.2uHNLV25 EBMS160808A102_RDC45
150P CH
150P CH
DAC_VIDEO_A L8502
C8504
C8506
C8519
0.1 B
C8503
RESET
C8502
1uHNLV25
0.001
1 F
SYS_MUTE
DUPRD1
SPDIF
DUPTD1
APWM_L+
APWM_L-
APWM_R+
APWM_R-
6 P.CON+1.8V_D 6
P.CON+3.3V_D
B8503
P.CON+5V_D P.CON+3.3V_D
GND BLM18PG121SN1D
1.8V REG IC
IC8502
LM1117S-ADJ
TO MEMORY ADJ OUT IN

1 2 3
RESET
B
C8511
B
DAC_VIDEO_A
C8520
C8538
DAC_A[Y]_VIDEO 0 0 3.3
P.CON+3.3V_D
0.001
2.2
12P CH P.CON+1.8V_D
GND 58
150P CH
150P CH
L8504
C8510
C8512
5 5
6.3V 100 SJV

1uHNLV25
1K +-1%
2.2K +-1%
68 +-1%
TO MOTOR DRIVE
C8501
C8516
R8508
R8509
F
R8507
1
P.CON+A5V_D
P.CON+3.3V_D
P.CON+6V_D
GND
M_GND
R8532 TIN_SW FROM/TO REGULATOR

47K
R8517 R8530 C8532 R8534 CP8501 (CP3002)
APWM_L-
A2001WR-14A
47K 2.2K 47P CH 15K
SSCRXD/TX 14
B
4 4
C8530
DUPTD1 W825
SSCTXD/RX 13
0.0012
W818
R8521 GND 12
APWM_L+ W824
DUPRD1 START_SW 11
R8506 47K
[U]C_VIDEO 10
220 [V]Y_VIDEO 9
16V 47 SJV
C8513
[Y]_VIDEO 8
56 RESET DVD RESET 7
C8534 R8539
DVD_A_OUT_L 6
16V 10 SJV 1K
GND 5
DVD_A_OUT_R 4
16V 47 SJV
0 4.3 4.3 6.9 D8510

CH
SYS_MUTE
0.1 B
R8510
C8514
C8525
4 3 2 1 ZERO 3
C8528
24K
R8528
R8537
10K
A_GND
47K
MA111
NJM4565M(TE1)
AUDIO_AMP IC
GND 2
150P
3 - SPDIF 3
IC8501
+ SPDIF-134 1
+
VCC
CH
-
R8516
R8527
C8527
10K
47K
5 6 7 8
150P
4.3 4.3 6.9 10.9

C8526
0.1 B
560P CH
C8533 57
0.01 B
0.01 B
0.01 B
560P CH
C8542
C8541
C8544
0.01 B
C8537
C8536
C8543
R8522 R8536
APWM_R+
47K 16V 10 SJV 1K
0.0012 B
R8535
C8529
10K
R8523 R8529 C8531 R8533

APWM_R-
2 47K 2.2K 47P CH 15K 2
R8531
47K
PCB130
DMG097
1 1
CAUTION:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY ARE ATTENTION:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES DURING PLAYBACK.
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES
A B C D E F G H
H-7 H-8
A B C D E F G H
MICON SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8
KEY_A1
KEY_B1
FROM OPERATION
W914
CD6202 (CP2201)
W862
W864
CH231204
1 GND
7 B6201 FCM1608KF-102T02 KEY_B1 7
2 KEY B
B6202 FCM1608KF-102T02 KEY_A1
3 KEY A
FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO
3.3 3.3
S
MCU_SCITXD
SW
G
3.3 Q6201
2SK3019_TL 3.3 3.3
S
MCU_SCIRXD
SW
G
3.3 Q6202 I2C_DATA
2SK3019_TL
R6220
R6222
I2C_CLK
100
100
6 ROM WRITER 6
TO AV SWITCH
SUB MICON
CP6201 A2001WV-11A RESET_N
1 GND
FLASH_WRITE_TXD
2 TX
MODE TO JACK
3 MODE
4 NC NC AUDIO_MUTE
AT+5V
5 VCC
6 CNVSS
FLASH_WRITE_RXD
R6215
R6219
7 RX
4.7K
4.7K
8 NC NC
RESET
C6210
0.1 B
9 RESET
R6214
4.7K
5 10 GND 5
11 GND 2.8 2.5 3.4 0 3.4 3.4 NC 3.4 NC FROM/TO FLASH
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 C6218
SUR_SW
HDMI_CEC
3.3V_POWER_H
AVSS
KEY_B
VREF
IVCC
IIC_OFF
0.5 3.2 0.1 B RESET_N
25
16
IIC_OFF
3.4 3.4 R6226 100
26
15
DTV_RESET ASEMD0
R6236 4.7K
3.4 3.3
27
14
NC STBY-H
R6205 25 KEY_A
3.4
28
13
MODE NC
33K 32 MAIN_MICON_TXD DVD_POWER
R6210 3.4 3.3
15 ASEMD0
29
12
EXT_MUTE SYS_POWER_H
4.7K
R6206 2.9 9 DISC_IN_DET 3.4 R6227
30
11
AUDIO_MUTE EEPROM_SDA
4.7K 8 REMOCON_IN 100
4 R6209 0 3.4 R6223 4
31
10
DVD_RESET 1 MAIN_MICON_RXD EEPROM_SCL FROM/TO REGULATOR
4.7K 100
CNVSS
RESET
R6211
XOUT
3.4 0
VCC
32
VSS
9
DVD_RESET
XIN
R6228
100
3.3V_POWER_H
SUB MICON IC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4.7K
IC6202 0.5 0 3.4 3.1 0 2.8 3.4 3.3 R6224
R6235
D5.0V R5F21124FP
NC NC 4.7K
PST3229NR
470 0 0
IR_REMO R6225 POWER_FAIL
5 4
R6231
SYS_POWER_H
NC NC
MA111
4.7K
D6209
RESET IC
470 START_SW
FROM/TO REMOCON LV_CTL
R6212
IC6201
CD6203 (CP7601) AT+5.8V AT+3.3V

OUT IN GND
100
MA111
C6221
0.1 B
CU251301
D6212
1 2 3
3 3
R6213
R6217
5 POWER ON LED AT+5.8V
4.7K
4.7K
R6233 5.0 5.0 3.4 3.4 0 1
4 STANDBY LED GND
100GT01615
330 SW
3 AT+5V D5.0V
16MHz
Q6203 R6203
X6201
0
BAT54WS
2 GND KRA103SRTK
D6205
10K IR_REMO
1 REMOCON IN
R6216
4.7K
R6204
10K
18P CH
20P CH
R6221
C6213
C6215
27K
0
SW 5.0 STBY-H
Q6204
6.3V 220 V-S

KRC102SRTK
0
C6209
2.2 B
0.01 B
C6205
C6212
C6216
0.1 B
(1608)
2 2
IR_REMO
AT+5.8V
STBY-H
D5.0V
ACCESSORY
BT001 BT002 PCBDH0

MNAAA(R03) MNAAA(R03) CEG360
TM101
000-103000540 NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
1 WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL. 1
A B C D E F G H
H-9 H-10
A B C D E F G H
SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8
FROM/TO JACK
SCALER IC IC2801 R8J66954BG
PC_V
PC_H PC_V 3.3

J1 PCVIN
PC_H 3.3
AV3/AV4_Y K1 SSIN1
C2946 0.1 B 1.6
AV1_CVBS K2 SSIN2
SW_Y_IN C2937 0.1 B 2 0.8
VGA-G L1 VIN3A
TU_CVBS C2939 0.1 B 1.1
AV3/AV4_PB L2 VIN1A
7 C2938 0.1 B 3 1.2
7
AV1_CVBS L3 VIN2A
VGA-B
AV3/AV4_PR C2940 0.1 B 0

M1 VREFA
VGA-R AV3/AV4_Y C2931 0.1 B 4 1.7
M2 VIN4A
SPDIF C2941 0.1 B 0
M3 VRPA
DVD-H
SW_C_IN C2932 0.1 B 5 2.0

FROM/TO TUNER N1 VIN2B
NC N2 VIN6A
C2927
TU_CVBS VGA-G 0.8 TO JACK
N3 VIN5A
0.1 B C2976
I2C_CLK C2942 0.1 B 0
6 N4 VRMA LOUT_FI 6
I2C_DATA 1 B
C2933 0.1 B 0 C2977
P1 VRPB
C2943 0.1 B ROUT_FI
0
TO HDMI P2 VREFB 1 B
AV3/AV4_PB C2934 0.1 B 6 1.9
P3 VIN3B
HP_RST TO AV SWITCH
C2944 0.1 B 0.3 DVD-H

R1 VREFC
C2935 0.1 B ASW0
0.2
R2 VRMB ASW2
FROM SCALER POWER C2925
VGA-B 0.8
R3 VIN4B ASW1
0.1 B ROUT
C2936 0.1 B 0.2
AD_A3.3V T1 VRPC
C2945 0.1 B LOUT FROM/TO FLASH
AV3/AV4_PR 1.6
T2 VIN2C
7
5 IIC_OFF 5
C2947 0.1 B 0.2
U1 VRMC I2C_CLK
FROM/TO AV SWITCH C2926 I2C_DATA
VGA-R 0.8
U2 VIN3C
0.1 B C2929 R2837
SW_Y_IN AD_A3.3V 3.3 LPF FROM/TO MICON
V1
0.1 B 1K
SW_C_IN
MCU_SCIRXD
MCLK MCU_SCITXD
I2C_CLK
SDOUT
I2C_DATA
LRCK W884
3.3 I2C_CLK
SICL V9 FROM/TO REGULATOR
BCLK
3.3 I2C_DATA
W9
S1_DET
TWIRE_RXDC
4 TWIRE_TXDC 4
VDIM
LCD-H
GND
D3.3V
R2853
R2857
10K
10K
AT+3.3V
3.3 ASW0
SCLK0(GPIO) AA8
3.3 ASW1
SRXD0(GPIO) Y8
3.3 ASW2 ASW2
STXD0(GPIO) W8
R2850
VDIM
R2846 4.7K C2959 C2965
QBLCA J21 3.0 BL_PWM
3.0 4.7K 0.1 B 0.1 B LCD-H
QBLCB(GPIO)J20
3.3 TWIRE_RXDC
QBLCC(RXD0)J19
3 3.3 TWIRE_TXDC 3
J18
R2849 R2847 4.7K
Y7 RFAGC(GPIO)
DAC_VREF
3.3 4.7K MCU_SCIRXD

V8
SPDIFO
W6 ADATAO
3.3 MCU_SCITXD
ROUT
AA4 LOUT
ACLK
SCIRXD V7
Y6 LRCKO
AA6 BCKO
SANT
3.3 IIC_OFF
SCISCK(GPIO) W7
AA3
W3
W4
W5
V4
Y5
V5
V6
EEP ROM
0
IC2805 M24256-BWMN6TP
1.6
2.0
2.0
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
0 3.3
A0 Vcc
R2838
8
R2840
4.7K
R2856 C2968
10K
0 0
A1 WP
7
0.1 B
10V 22 V-S
0 3.3 10K
A2 SCL
6
R2839
R2842
C2948
C2949
0.1 B
10K
4.7K
2 0 3.3 2
Vss SDA
5
R2874
W881
4.7K
R2841
220P CH
220P CH
10K
C2950
C2951
I2C_DATA
I2C_CLK
HP_RST
S1_DET
SDOUT
DVD-H
SPDIF
ROUT
MCLK
LOUT
LRCK
BCLK
PCBDH0
CEG360
1 NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

1
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.
A B C D E F G H
H-11 H-12
A B C D E F G H
TUNER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (DIGITAL PCB)

8 TU5801 ENG36E18KRF
8
23
25
20 IF_OUT1
21 IF_OUT2
NC(BB)
19 IF_AGC
18 IF_OUT
8 V_OUT
5 SIF-out
12 +30V
7 AGC
14 SDA
15 SCL
IF_O
16 AFT
9 +5V
17 +5V
NC
NC
NC
11 TU
1
4
TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO
22
24
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
1.0
5.0
5.0
2.5
5.0
1.0
0.6
1.4
30.0
NC
1.0
5.0
8 W878
TU_CVBS
33P CH 22uHNLV25
L5801
C5814
7 7
6.3V 220 V-S
22P CH
22P CH
22P CH
50V(1608)
0.1 B
0.1 B
C5805
0.1 B
0.1 B
C5806
C5809
C5810
C5811
C5812
C5803
C5804
B5802
C5801
FCM1608KF-102T02
FCM1608KF-102T02
6.3V 220 V-S
B5803
B5801
FCM1608KF-102T02
6 6
IF_OUT_1
IF_OUT_2
R5801
IF_AGC
150K
R5802
R5803
47K
100
SCALER IC
IC2801 R8J66954BG
R5804
R5819 C5844
100
1.4
AA1
0.22uHLQW18AN
100 0.01 B
ADIN1
56P CH
C5846
L5805
R5824
47K
5 R5820 C5845 0.6 5
Y1 ADIN0
100 0.01 B VSB_ADC
R5825
1.6
47K
W2 ADVREF0
1.6
Y2 ADVREF1
0.8
AA2 ADVREF2
C5852
0.1 B
C5853
C5855
0.1 B
0.1 B
R5823 1.0
AA7 IF_AGC
1K
0.33 B
C5820
FROM REGULATOR
TUNER_IF
GND
0.1 B
C5847
4 D5.0V 4
TUNER+30V
R5817
R5818
4.7K
4.7K
D3.3V
TU_AFT 2.4
AA5 MCUADIN0 MCU_ADC
3.3
G
3.3 R5822 3.3
I2C0C Y9 SICL0
D
S
G
R5821 47
5.0 3.3 5.0 3.3 I2C0D 3.3 IIC0
AA9 SIDA0
D
S
BUFFER 47
BUFFER Q5804
R5815
R5816
47P CH
47P CH
3.3K
3.3K
Q5803 2SK3019_TL
C5822
C5821
R5807
100K
2SK3019_TL
3 3
C5819
B5804 6.3V 220 V-S
FCM1608KF-151T06 BTSC DEMODULATOR IC
IC5801 AN5832SA-E1V
R5808
C5823 0.33 B 3.5

4.7K
NC
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PILOT DET NC
C5818 R5813
3.5 2.2 C5833 2.2 B
PLL L+R REF
0.22 B C5824 3.3K 0 2.8 C5834 0.033 B
VCC SAP DET
2.9 C5835 0.1 B
0.1 B NC NC NOISE DET
C5817
SIF_OUT 2.2
INPUT SIF/BB NC
BUFFER 0.001 B C5825 4.7 B 3.3
R5809
Q5802 SIF REF MUTE NC

4.7K

2SK3019_TL C5826 2.2 B 2.2
STEREO REF FOMO NC
2 R5810 100 5.0 2
D
S
I2C_DATA SDA/SAPID MODE NC

3.3 5.0 0
G
GND AGC SW NC
8
3.3 R5811 180K 5.0

3.3 5.0 NC PE IIC/PARA
7
R5812 100 5.0 2.4 C5837 0.022 B

D
S
I2C_CLK SCL/STID SPE FIL

6
C5827 2.2 B 1.7 2.4 C5838 0.1 B

G
3.3 AGC DET SPE DEL

5
2.2 0.5 C5839 3.3 B

BUFFER ROUT SPE TIME
4
Q5801 2.2 2.9 C5840 0.33 B

LOUT WB DET
3
2SK3019_TL
0.5 C5841 10 C PCBDH0
NC NC WB TIME
CAUTION:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY ARE
2
TO AV SWITCH
C5830 2.2 B 1.3
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME CEG360
L-R RBF NC NC OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
1
TU_AUDIO_R
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY
TU_AUDIO_L
1 1
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
ATTENTION:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL. N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
A B C D E F G H
H-13 H-14
A B C D E F G H
HDMI SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8
7 7
SCALER IC IC2801 R8J66954BG
6 6
FROM SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO
R3629
EXT_RES 3.3
J2 EXT_RES
HP_RST
B3601 470
BLM18PG181SN1D
0.1 B
C3612
EEP_ROM IC
D3607 IC3602
SS160 S-24CS02AFJ-TB-GE WP
JG3604
0 SCL
4.96 JG3605 4.96 3.32
A0 VCC SDA
1
8
3.3
D
HDMI_SCL
S
0 JG3606 G4 HDMI_SCL10
4.98
A1 WP BUFFER
2
7
FROM SCALER POWER
G
0 4.96
R3630
DDC_SCL Q3607 3.32
4.7K
A2 SCL
3
6
0 4.98 2SK3019_TL
VDD33 GND SDA DDC_SDA
4
4.7K
10K
47K
5 5
4.98 3.32 3.3
D
HDMI_SDA
R3610
R3614
R3616
S
F3 HDMI_SDA10
C3605 BUFFER
G
3.32
R3631
Q3608
4.7K
0.1 B 2SK3019_TL HDMI_POWER 0
BAT54WS
FROM REGURATOR E3 PWR0

D3611
D3.3V 3.32 C3610

D BUFFER HDMI_XIN 0
D5.0V C3603 E1 HDMI_XIN
0 G Q3603 8P CH
GND
100GT01807
18.432MHz
2SK3019_TL
R3632
0.1 B
X3601
0 S
1M
R3621
R3612
HDMI CONNECTOR
1K
R3619
CP3602 1A0300030 10K
10K
C3611 R3641 0
HDMI_XOUT E2 HDMI_XOUT
24
0 10P CH 1K
23 C3616
0.03 R3643
HPD_SW HP_RST
4 22 Q3610 4.7K C3613
0.1 B
R3633
4
KTC3875S_Y_RTK 0 PLL_XFC_A 0
21 NC NC C1 PLL_XFC_A
20 NC NC 4.7 B 4.7K
R3618
19 HOT PLUG
R3602
18 +5V_POWER 22K C3614 R3634 0
D3601 PLL_XFC_P D1 PLL_XFC_P
10
17 DDC_GND 0.0022 B 3.3K
AVRL161A1R1NT R3603 100 C3618
16 DDC_SDA
R3604 100
15 DDC_SCL 0.001 B
D3602 C3615 R3635 0
PLL_XFC_X D2 PLL_XFC_X
14 RESERVED NC
AVRL161A1R1NT 0.027 B 8.2K
13 CEC NC
12 TMDS_CLK- HDMI_CLOCK_N 3.3
F1 RXCN
1
L3603
11 TMDS_CLK_SH
EXC28CG900U HDMI_CLOCK_P 3.3
F2 RXCP
2
10 TMDS_CLK+
3 HDMI_DATA0_N 3.3 3
9 TMDS_DATA0- G1 RX0N
3
8 TMDS_DATA0_SH HDMI_DATA0_P 3.3

G2 RX0P
4
7 TMDS_DATA0+
6 TMDS_DATA1- HDMI_DATA1_N 3.3
G3 RX1N
1
L3604
5 TMDS_DATA1_SH
EXC28CG900U HDMI_DATA1_P 3.3
H3 RX1P
2
4 TMDS_DATA1+
HDMI_DATA2_N 3.3
3 TMDS_DATA2- H1 RX2N
3
2 TMDS_DATA2_SH HDMI_DATA2_P 3.3

H2 RX2P
4
1 TMDS_DATA2+
2 2
PCBDH0
CEG360
1 NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED 1
A B C D E F G H
H-15 H-16
A B C D E F G H
LVDS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8
7 SCALER IC IC2801 R8J66954BG 7
NR2812
1.6 CH1_TXOUT0-
LVDS1OUT0M A19 CRA108220JV TO PANEL
1.6 CH1_TXOUT0+
LVDS1OUT0P B19
CP2804
A2006WV0-2X15P
1.6 CH1_TXOUT1-
B2806 3.3 LVDS1OUT1M A20 RXE0- 30
C15 PLLAVCC_1 1.6 CH1_TXOUT1+
LVDS_CH1
HCB1608KF-221T20 LVDS1OUT1P A21 RXE1- 29
B2807 3.3 RXE2- 28
A17 PLLAVCC_2 NR2813
1.6 CH1_TXOUT2-
HCB1608KF-221T20 LVDS1OUT2M B20 CRA108220JV RXEC- 27
16V 10 V-S
16V 10 V-S
C2874
C2880
1.6 CH1_TXOUT2+
0.1 B
0.1 B
6 6
C2974
C2975
LVDS1OUT2P B21 RXE3- 26
GND 25
FROM REGULATOR 0
D14 PLLAVSS 1.6 CH1_TXCLKOUT-
LVDS1CLKOUTM C19 RXO0- 24
0 1.6 CH1_TXCLKOUT+
PLL POWER
GND A18 PLLAVSS LVDS1CLKOUTP D19 RXO1- 23
RXO2- 22
D3.3V R2816
1.6 CH1_TXOUT3-
B2808 LVDS1OUT3M C20 RXOC- 21
1.0 22 R2871
D1.0V E13 PLLDVDD_1 1.6 CH1_TXOUT3+
LVDS1OUT3P C21 RXO3- 20
HCB1608KF-221T20
22
VDD_PANEL B2809 GND 19
1.0
B17 PLLDVDD_2 LVDS1OUT4M D20 NC GND 18
HCB1608KF-221T20
4V 47 V-S
4V 47 V-S
C2881
LVDS1OUT4P D21 NC GND 17
0.1 B
C2869
C2875
C2877
0.1 B
VDD+5V/+3.3V 16
RXE0+ 15
0
E14 PLLDVSS NR2811 RXE1+ 14
5 0 1.6 CRA108220JV
5
D15 PLLDVSS LVDS0OUT0M E19 CH0_TXOUT0- RXE2+ 13
1.6 CH0_TXOUT0+
LVDS0OUT0P F19 RXEC+ 12
1.4 RXE3+ 11
E18 LPFP 1.6 CH0_TXOUT1-
LVDS0OUT1M E20
GND 10
R2835
1.6 CH0_TXOUT1+
1K
0 LVDS0OUT1P E21
D18 REFR RXO0+ 9
RXO1+ 8
R2836
0.01 B
5.6K
C2868
NR2810
CH0_TXOUT2- RXO2+ 7
LVDS_CH0
1.6 CRA108220JV
LVDS0OUT2M F20
1.6 CH0_TXOUT2+ RXOC+ 6
0 LVDS0OUT2P F21
D17 VSS33BIAS RXO3+ 5
1.6 CH0_TXCLKOUT- GND 4
LVDS0CLKOUTM G18
LVDS POWER/REF
1.6 GND 3
LVDS0CLKOUTP G19 CH0_TXCLKOUT+
B2804 3.3
F17 VCC33BIAS VDD+5V/+3.3V 2
4 HCB1608KF-221T20 R2800 4
1.6 CH0_TXOUT3- VDD+5V/+3.3V 1
B2805 LVDS0OUT3M G20
3.3 R2830
E17 VCC33LVDS 1.6 22 CH0_TXOUT3+
HCB1608KF-221T20 3.3 LVDS0OUT3P G21
F18 VCC33LVDS
10V 22 V-S
10V 22 V-S
22
C2871
0.1 B
C2866
C2876
C2879
0.1 B
V2801_1
T220SW01_VO
0
E16 VSS33LVDS LVDS0OUT4M H20 NC
0
G17 VSS33LVDS LCD PANEL
LVDS0OUT4P H21 NC
B2803
1.0
H17 VCC10LVDS
HCB1608KF-221T20
4V 47 V-S
LVDS
C2872
0.1 B
C2867
RSDSA H18 NC CD2804

RSDSB H19 NC
0 EA2U2503
J17 VSS10LVDS
3 3
B2800
BLM18PG181SN1D
2 2
PCBDH0
CEG360
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
CAUTION:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
ARE ATTENTION:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
1 DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
1
A B C D E F G H
H-17 H-18
A B C D E F G H
SCALER POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8
TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO
7 SCALER IC 7
IC2801 R8J66954BG AD_A3.3V
B2813
3.3
AVDDA J4
3.3 BLM18PG121SN1D
AVDDB K4
B2810 3.3 3.3
E5 VCCQ33 AVDDC L4
3.3
4V 330 V-S
HCB1608KF-221T20 E6 VCCQ33
3.3
C2905
C2902
C2903
C2904
0.1 B
0.1 B
0.1 B
E11 VCCQ33
3.3 Io_Power
U5 VCCQ33
3.3
U8 VCCQ33
10V 22 V-S 0
C2890
C2897
C2887
C2893
C2883
ADVSS F5
0.1 B
0.1 B
1 B
1 B
0
ADVSS G5
0
ADVSS H4
B2812 1.0 0
E7 VDD ADVSS J5
6 HCB1608KF-221T20 1.0
E9 VDD 0 (16-08) 6
1.0 ADVSS L5
E15 VDD W915
1.0
J9 VDD
4V 100 V-S
1.0
J10 VDD
C2882
1.0 3.3
C2898
C2894
J11 VDD
1 B
0.1 B
1.0 PLLVDD P4
J12 VDD A3.3V
C2910
1.0
C2906
0.1 B
J13 VDD
1 B
1.0
K9 VDD
1.0
K13 VDD 0
1.0 Core_Power PLLVSS N5
L9 VDD
1.0 B2815 A3.3V
L13 VDD 3.3
1.0 DLLVDD T4
M9 VDD
C2907
C2911
1.0 BLM18PG121SN1D
0.1 B
1 B
M13 VDD
1.0
N9 VDD 0
1.0 DLLVSS P5
N10 VDD
1.0
C2884
C2885
C2886
C2888
C2889
C2892
C2895
C2899
B2816
0.1 B
1 B
0.1 B
0.1 B
0.1 B
N11 VDD
1 B
1 B
1 B
1.0 VCC33AD_A V3 3.3
N12 VDD
4V 330 V-S
C2912
1.0 BLM18PG121SN1D
C2908
0.1 B
C2914
N13 VDD
1 B
5 1.0 5
T5 VDD
1.0 VSS33AD_A W1 0
U6 VDD
1.0
U9 VDD B2817
3.3
VCC33DA_A Y4
BLM18PG121SN1D
C2909
C2913
0.1 B
1 B
C2896
C2900
0.1 B
1 B
0
VSS33DA_A Y3
B2820
3.3
VDD33 J3
BLM18PG121SN1D
10V 22 V-S
3.3
VDD33 U4
C2920
C2917
C2923
0.1 B
0.1 B
B2811
3.3 0 TO HDMI
M4 DVDDABC VSS33 H5
HCB1608KF-221T20 0
M5 DVSSABC 0
VSS33 R5 VDD33
10V 22 V-S
D3.3V
C2891
C2901
0.1 B
B2821
3.3
4 VDD33ADDAV2 4
BLM18PG121SN1D
10V 22 V-S
C2921
C2918
0.1 B
0 0
E8 VSS VSS33ADDAU3
0
E10 VSS
0
E12 VSS B2822
0 1.8
K10 VSS VDD18 K3
0
K11 VSS 1.8 BLM18PG121SN1D
0 VDD18 T3
K12 VSS
0
10V 22 V-S
L10 VSS GND D1.8V
C2924
0
C2919
C2922
0.1 B
0.1 B
L11 VSS
0
L12 VSS
0 0
M10 VSS VSS18 K5
0
M11 VSS 0
0 VSS18 R4
M12 VSS
0
U7 VSS
FROM REGULATOR
3 3
D1.0V
D1.8V
GND
D3.3V
2 2
PCBDH0
CEG360
1 NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED 1

A B C D E F G H
H-19 H-20
A B C D E F G H
FLASH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8
CP2803 A2001WV-12A SCALER IC IC2801 R8J66954BG

TCK D3.3V
EEP/PC_TOOL_JIG_CON TCK 1
RESET/MODE
RESET_N 3.3
CP2801 A2001WV-9A TRST_N R2808 A1 RESET_N
TRST_N 2
9 NC/RESET NC TDO 3.3
TDO 3 R2807 10K E4 MODE0
8 D3.3V D3.3V ASEBRKAK_N ASEBRKAK_N 4 0
PC_TOOL_TX 10K F4 MODE1
7 PC_TOOL_TX TMS TMS 5
PC_TOOL_RX ASEMD0 3.3
6 PC_TOOL_RX TDI B1 ASEMD0
TDI 6
5 D_GND RESET_N ASEBRKAK_N 0
RESET_N 7 C2 ASEBRKAK_N
IIC_OFF R2809
4 IIC_OFF FLASH_WP
E10A DEBUG
FLASH_WP 8 TDO 0
I2C_DATA A2 TDO
3 SDA ASEMD0 10K
ASEMD0 9
7 I2C_CLK C2807 C2808 TDI 0 7
2 SCL B2 TDI
GND 10
1 GND 0.1 B 0.1 B TMS 0
VDD33 11 C3 TMS
GND 12 TCK 3.3
D3 TCK
TRST_N 0
D4 TRST_N
GND
D3.3V B2801 D3.3V_FLASH R2810

USB_CS 0
HCB1608KF-221T20 A6 WAIT_N(GPIO)
10V 22 V-S
10K
WE0_N 3.3
C2802
C6 WE0_N
6 CS0_N 3.3
B9 CS0_N
6
RD_N 3.3
0.1 B
A9 RD_N
C2803
R2802
R2811
10K NEAR FLASH
NOR FLASH IC 10K A22 0
B6 A22(GPIO)
IC2804 EN29LV320AB-70TCP A21 3.3
D6 A21
A20 3.3
A5 A20
A16 3.3 3.3 A17 A19 3.3
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
A15 A16 D7 A19
1
R2805 NR2802 A18 3.3
A15 3.3 3.3 C7 A18
A14 BYTE# A17 3.3
2
CRA108100JV A14 A17
A14 3.3 0 10K A16 3.3
A13 VSS D15 B3 A16
3
A15 3.3
A13 3.3 3.3 D7 A3 A15
A12 DQ15/A-1 A14 3.3
4
D14 C4 A14
A12 3.3 3.3 A13 3.3
A11 DQ7 D6 B4 A13
5
A12 3.3
A11 3.3 3.3 A4 A12
A10 DQ14 A11 3.3
6
5 A10 3.3 3.3
NR2803
A10 3.3
D5 A11 5
A9 DQ6 CRA108100JV C5 A10
7
A9 3.3
A9 3.3 3.3 D13 B5 A9
A8 DQ13 A8 3.3
8
D5 B7 A8
A20 3.3 3.3 A7 3.3
A19 DQ5 D12 A7 A7
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
A6 3.3
A21 3.3 3.3 D4 D8 A6
A20 DQ12 A5 3.3
FLASH I/F
C8 A5
WE0_N 3.3 3.3 A4 3.3
WE# DQ4 B8 A4
C2806 NR2804 A3 3.3
RESET_N 3.3 3.3 A8 A3
RESET# VCC CRA108100JV A2 3.3
0.1 B D9 A2
3.3 D11 A1 3.3
NC A21/NC DQ11 C9 A1
0 3.3 D3
FLASH_WP WP#/ACC DQ3 D10
JG2801 3.3 D2
RY/BY# DQ10 BLON 3.3
B14 (GPIO)
A19 3.3 3.3
A18 DQ2 NR2801
A18 3.3 3.3 CRA108100JV
A17 DQ9
A8 3.3 3.3 D9 D15 3.3
A7 DQ1 A13 D15
D1 D14 3.3
4 A7 3.3 3.3 C13 D14 4
A6 DQ8 D8 D13 3.3
A12 D13
A6 3.3 3.3 D0 D12 3.3
A5 DQ0 C12 D12
FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO D11 3.3
A5 3.3 3.3 RD_N A11 D11
A4 OE# D10 3.3
C11 D10
R2806
A4 3.3 0 D9 3.3
10K
A3 VSS A10 D9
D8 3.3
A3 3.3 3.3 CS0_N C10 D8
IIC_OFF A2 CE# D7 3.3
B13 D7
A2 3.3 3.3 D6 3.3
I2C_DATA A1 A0 D13 D6
D5 3.3
I2C_CLK B12 D5
D4 3.3
D12 D4
A1 D3 3.3
B11 D3
D2 3.3
D11 D2
D1 3.3
B10 D1
TO JACK D0 3.3
D10 D0
A_MUTE
3 3
FROM/TO MICON JG2803
PC_TOOL_RX 0
C16 M32TDI
ASEMD0 PC_TOOL_TX JG2804 0
M32R DEBUG
D16 M32TDO
IIC_OFF
JG2805 0
RESET_N C17 M32TCK
A_MUTE JG2806 3.3
C18 M32TMS
JG2802 0
B18 M32TRST_N
FROM/TO REGULATOR
NC C14 VCNT(GPIO)
27MHz CLK
C2809 R2812
BLON 1.2
A16 XOUT
100GT02728
2 2
R2814
D3.3V 8P CH 1.8K
X2801
GND
27MHz
1M
GND
1.2
B16 XIN
C2810
10P CH 9
C2811 R2813
1.2
A15 XOUT25
25MHz CLK
27P CH 1.8K PCBDH0
R2815
100GT02509
CEG360
25MHz
1M
X2802
1.2
B15 XIN25
C2812
20P CH 10
1 1
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
A B C D E F G H
H-21 H-22
A B C D E F G H
DDR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8
R2823 27
DDR_SDRAM IC DARAS_N
IC2802 HYB18TC256160BF-3S
R2824 27 DACKE
DAA0 1.8 1.8 DAQ0 NR2805

M8 A0 DQ0 G8 SCALER IC IC2801 R8J66954BG CRA108270JV
DAA1 1.8 1.8 DAQ1
M3 A1 DQ1 G2 DABA1
DAA2 1.8 1.8 DAQ2
M7 A2 DQ2 H7 DAODT
DAA3 1.8 1.8 DAQ3 R2825 5.1
N2 A3 DQ3 H3 DACLK 1.6 1.8 DAA4
DAA4 1.8 1.8 DAQ4 W20 SDCLK SDODT V18
N8 A4 DQ4 H1 R2826 5.1 DAA12
DAA5 1.8 1.8 DAQ5 DACLK_N 1.6 SDCLK_N
N3 A5 DQ5 H9 W21
DAA6 1.8 1.8 DAQ6
N7 A6 DQ6 F1
DAA7 1.8 1.8 DAQ7 1.8 NR2806
P2 A7 DQ7 F9 SDBA0 AA19
DAA8 1.8 1.8 DAQ8 CRA108270JV
P8 A8 DQ8 C8 1.8 SDCKE 1.8
7 DAA9 1.8 DQ9 1.8 DAQ9 Y20 SDBA1 V17 DAA8 7
P3 A9 C2
DAA10 1.8 1.8 DAQ10 1.8 SDCS_N DAA6
M2 A10 DQ10 D7 V21
1.8 1.8 1.8 DAA0
DAA11 P7 DQ11 D3 DAQ11 V19 SDRAS_N
A11 R2827 DACS_N
DAA12 1.8 1.8 DAQ12 DACAS_N 1.8
R2 A12 DQ12 D1 Y21 SDCAS_N
1.8 DAQ13 27 1.8 1.8 NR2807
DQ13 D9 Y19 SDWE_N SDA0 U20
1.8 DAQ14 CRA108270JV
DQ14 B1 1.8 DAA2
SDA1 AA18
1.8 DAQ15 DAWE_N
DQ15 B9 DACLK SDA2 AA20
1.8
DACLK DABA0
1.8 DAA10
SDA3 AA17
DAQM0 1.8 1.8
P21 SDDM0 SDA4
R2820
U18
R2817
160
DAQM1 1.8 1.8 NR2808
160
L21 SDDM1 SDA5 V16
DADQS0 1.8 1.6 CRA108270JV
F7 LDQS CK J8 NC 0 SDDM2 1.8
DACLK_N AA14 SDA6 U21 DAA1
DADQS0_N 1.8 1.6 DACLK_N
E8 LDQS CK K8 0 SDDM3 1.8 DAA9
DADQS1 1.8 1.8 DACS_N NC AA11 SDA7 Y16 DAA3
B7 UDQS CS L8 DADQS0 1.8 SDDQS0 1.8
N18 SDA8 T20 DAA7
6 DADQS1_N 1.8 1.8 DARAS_N 6
A8 UDQS RAS K7 DADQS1 1.8 SDDQS1 1.8
K18 SDA9 Y17
DAQM0 1.8 1.8 DACAS_N
F3 LDM CAS L7 0 1.8
DAQM1 1.8 1.8 DAODT NC V13 SDDQS2 SDA10 Y18
B3 UDM ODT K9 0 SDDQS3 1.8 NR2809
DACKE 1.8 NC V10 SDA11 W16
K2 CKE DADQS0_N 1.8 CRA108270JV
N19 SDDQS0_N 1.8
DAWE_N 1.8 SDA12 T18 DAA11
K3 WE DADQS1_N 1.8 DAA5
K19 SDDQS1_N
DABA0 1.8
L2 BA0 0 SDDQS2_N NC NC
NC W13
DABA1 1.8 0 NC NC
L3 BA1 NC W10 SDDQS3_N
B
A3 VSS
DAQ3 1.8
5 0 R20 SDDQ0 5
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
E3 VSS
DAQ1 1.8
1
0 R21 SDDQ1
J3 VSS
DAQ4 1.8
C2861
0 T21 SDDQ2
C2841
C2842
C2846
C2849
C2853
C2855
C2856
C2857
C2858
N1 VSS
DAQ5 1.8 FROM REGULATOR
0 R18 SDDQ3
P9 VSS
DAQ0 1.8
0 P18 SDDQ4 GND
A7 VSSQ 1.8
VDD A1 DAQ2 1.8
0 1.8 R19 SDDQ5 D1.8V
B2 VSSQ VDD E1
1.8 DAQ7 1.8 VCCQ18 K20 1.8
0.1 B
0 VDD J9 N20 SDDQ6
0.1 B
0.1 B
0.1 B
B8 VSSQ 1.8
1B
1B
1B
VDD M9 DAQ6 1.8 0

0 1.8 P20 SDDQ7 VSS K17
D2 VSSQ VDD R1
1.8 DAQ12 1.8 0
B
0 VDDQA9 M20 SDDQ8 VSS L17
C2813
C2815
C2817
C2819
C2823
C2825
C2831
D8 VSSQ 1.8
VDDQC1 DAQ8 1.8 0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0 1.8 L18 SDDQ9 VSS M19
E7 VSSQ VDDQC3
1.8 DAQ14 1.8 VCCQ18 M17 1.8
0 VDDQC7 L20 SDDQ10
F2 VSSQ
C2843
C2847
C2848
C2852
C2854
1.8 1.8
0 VDDQC9 DAQ10 M18 SDDQ11 SDVREF0 N17 0.9
F8 VSSQ VDDQE9 1.8
DAQ13 1.8 SDDQ12 VCCCQ18 P19 1.8
0 1.8 L19
H2 VSSQ VDDQG1
4 0 1.8 DAQ11 1.8
N21 SDDQ13 VSS P17
0 4
H8 VSSQ VDDQG3
DAQ15 1.8 0
0.1 B
0.1 B
0.1 B
1.8
0.1 B
0.1 B
0.1 B
0 VDDQG7 K21 SDDQ14 VSS R17

J7 VSSDL
1B
1B
1B
1.8 1.8
VDDQG9 DAQ9 M21 SDDQ15 VCCQ18 T19 1.8
1.8
VDDLJ1 1.8 VCCQ18 T17 1.8
C2814
C2816
C2818
C2820
C2824
C2826
C2836
C2838
C2840
0.9 NC Y14 SDDQ16
VREFJ2 1.8 0
NC W15 SDDQ17 VSS U19
1.8 VSS 0
NC V14 SDDQ18 U17
1.8 1.8
NC V15 SDDQ19 VCCQ18 V20
1.8 VCCQ18 W19 1.8
NC R8 NC6 NC AA16 SDDQ20
1.8 VCCQ18 W18 1.8
NC R7 NC5 NC Y15 SDDQ21
1.8 VSS 0
NC R3 NC4 NC AA15 SDDQ22 W17
1.8 0
NC L1 NC3 NC Y13 SDDQ23 VSS AA21
1.8 VSS 0
NC E2 NC2 D1.8V NC V11 SDDQ24 U16
1.8 0
3 NC A2 NC1 NC W11 SDDQ25 VSS U15 3
1.8 VCCQ18 U14 1.8
Y11 SDDQ26
1K +-1%
NC
C2821
R2818
0.1 B
1.8 0
NC V12 SDDQ27 VSS W14
1.8 SDDQ28 0.9
NC AA13 SDVREF1 U13
1.8 1.8
NC AA12 SDDQ29 VCCQ18 W12
1.8 0
1K +-1%
Y12 SDDQ30 VSS U12
R2828
NC
C2844
C2850
0.1 B
0.1 B
1.8 VSS 0
NC AA10 SDDQ31 U11
1K +-1%
0
R2819
VSS
C2822
Y10
0.1 B
VCCQ18 U10 1.8

C2859
1K +-1%
1B
R2829
C2845
C2851
0.1 B
0.1 B
6.3V(2125)
C2860
2 2
10V 22 V-S
PCBDH0
CEG360
1 NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED 1

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.
A B C D E F G H
H-23 H-24
A B C D E F G H
JACK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (DIGITAL PCB)

8 8
FROM REGULATOR
GND
DVD-H FILTER_MUTE
DIGITAL AUDIO SW IC DVD_SPDIF
IC6556 D5.0V
SN74LVC1G3157DCKR
ZERO_MUTE
R6551
DVD_SPDIF 2.9 3.3 AT+5.8V
B2 SW
6
HDMI AUDIO IN 100
J4302 B6551
B4303 R4316 11 0 3.3
PJ-364H GND VCC D3.3V
5
7 DVI_A_IN_L BLM18PG121SN1D 7
5 NC FCM1608KF-151T06 1K R6552
SPDIF 2.9 3.3 SPDIF_OUT
R4319
4 NC B1 A
4
56K
L 100
2 TO AV SWITCH
6.3V(2125)
B4304 R4317 12
4.7 B
C6554
3 DVI_A_IN_R
R FCM1608KF-151T06 1K
22P CH
22P CH
AV1_Y
R4318
6
C4312
C4314
NC
56K
7 AV1_C
NC
DVD-H
1
DVI_A_IN_L
DVI_A_IN_R
COAXIAL AV1_A_IN_L
D AUDIO DRIVER J4301
AV1_A_IN_R
Q4301 RCA-101HT(OR)
YUV_A_IN_L
B4301 KTC3875S_Y_RTK R4309 C4304 B4302
E
D5.0V YUV_A_IN_R
1
6 FCM1608KF-151T06 5.0 2.8 FCM1608CF-600T06 6
10V 100 V-S

68 0.1 B
R4302
C4302
3.2
1.5K
C4301 R4301
100P CH
C4306
R4307
R4310
100K
PC_V
220
0.1 B 2.2K
PC_H
0.022 B
R4306
C4303
3.3K
AV1_CVBS
FROM/TO JACK OUT VGA-R
VGA-G
(CP8101)
CP4301 TWG-P23P-A1 VGA-B
AV3/AV4_Y
23 LOUT
R3431 D3402 AV3/AV4_PB
22 GND FILTER_MUTE
D3401 AV3/AV4_PR
470 MUTE SW 12.5 MA111 DVD-H
21 ROUT SPDIF
Q3407 D3403
20 GND KRC102SRTK MA111 DVD-H
5 AV1_C 0 MA111 MUTE_SW LOUT_FI
5
19 AV1_C
0 Q3402 ROUT_FI
18 GND KRA101SRTK
R3412 R3405
17 AV1_Y AV1_Y MUTE_SW 5.0
Q3404 4.7K 4.7K 0 3.3 FROM FLASH
16 GND
R3413
KTC3875S_Y_RTK 3.3
YUV_A_IN_L
4.7K
15 YUV L IN 0
A_MUTE
MUTE_SW 0
14 GND Q3409
LOUT_SOUND 0 ZERO_MUTE
13 YUV R IN YUV_A_IN_R KRA101SRTK FROM MICON
R3428
0 0 5.0 AT+5.8V
12 GND MUTE SW
AV1_CVBS Q3411 1K AUDIO_MUTE
11 CVBS1 0 R3421
KTC3875S_Y_RTK 5.0
10 GND
1.5K
AV1_A_IN_L W840 A_MUTE
9 AV1 L IN
MUTE SW
8 GND ROUT_SOUND Q3410
4 7 AV1 R IN AV1_A_IN_R KTC3875S_Y_RTK 4
4.5 AUDIO_MUTE
6 GND R3427
AV3/AV4_PR 0
5 AV3_V
0 1K
4 GND
AV3/AV4_PB
C3413
4.7 B
(2125)
3 AV3_U
2 GND
1 AV3_Y AV3/AV4_Y
C4319 82P CH
C4320 82P CH
C4323 82P CH
C4317 82P CH
C4318 82P CH
C4313 82P CH
8.2K
8.2K
R4329
R4330
3 3
D-SUB
CP4303 WD-00021-R
W842 R4303
VGA-R VGA-R R3434
1 ROUT_SOUND ROUT_FI
100
2 VGA-G 1K
W844 R4304
VGA-G R3433
3 VGA-B LOUT_SOUND LOUT_FI
100
4 NC NC 1K
5 DGND
6 AGND R4305
W846
75
VGA-B
75
75
7 AGND
100
8 AGND
R4347
R4346
R4343
9 NC NC
10 DGND
2 2
11 NC NC
12 DDCD NC R4340 W867
13 VGAHS PC_H
R4344 2.2K W871
14 VGAVS PC_V
NC 2.2K
15 DDCC
R4334
R4332
3.3K
3.3K
PCBDH0
CEG360
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
1 1
A B C D E F G H
H-25 H-26
A B C D E F G H
AV SWITCH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8
SW+12V
Lch SW IC
R6581
R6584
16V 10 V-S
Lch SW IC
56K
56K
IC6557 NJM2534V FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO
C6564
IC6552 NJM2534V
C6570 C6581 R6589
L6561 0 4.3 0 6.5 AV1_A_IN_L LRCK
1
8
1
22uHNLCV32T 1 B 1 B 100
SDOUT
BUFFER 16V(1608) BUFFER 16V(1608)
4.0 3.3 ASW0 SW_L 6.5 3.3 ASW2 BCLK
2
7
2
MCLK
C6567 R6579 C6579 R6586
7 9.3 4.8 TU_AUDIO_L 12.0 6.6 YUV_A_IN_L ASW0 7
3
6
3
13 1B 100 BAIAS 1B 100
16V(1608)
C6551
R6558 R6562 BAIAS SW_Y_IN
1 B
AUDIO_L 16V(1608) 16V(1608)
4.9 3.2 DVD-H 6.5 3.3 ASW1 SW_C_IN
4
5
4
3.3K 2.7K
C6563
R6583
1 B
16V(1608)
R6585
14
R6578
10K
10K
R6559 R6561 ASW1
10K
AUDIO_R
D3.3V ASW2
3.3K 2.7K
16V(1608) DVD-H
C6565 R6573 C6553 R6555
DVD_L DVI_A_IN_L
AUDIO_ADC IC 1 B 100 1B 100
16V(1608)
IC6551 AK5358A
C6562 R6566 Rch SW IC Rch SW IC
3.8 0
16
AINR CKS0
1
IC6553 NJM2534V IC6558 NJM2534V
1B 4.7K FROM TUNER
C6571 C6568 R6587
C6561 16V(1608) R6567 0 0 6.5 AV1_A_IN_R
3.8 0
1
8
1
15
CKS2 TU_AUDIO_L
2
AINL 1B 100
6 1B 4.7K 1B 6
BUFFER 16V(1608) BUFFER 16V(1608) TU_AUDIO_R
16V(1608) 4.0 SW_R 6.5 3.3
5.0 3.3
2
7
2
14
3 CKS1 DIF
R6560
R6563
4.7K
4.7K
C6583 R6580 C6580 R6588
9.3 4.8 TU_AUDIO_R 12.0 6.6 YUV_A_IN_R
C6557 2.2 B(1608) 2.5 3.3
3
6
3
13
VCOM PDN
4
1 B 100 BAIAS 1B 100

BAIAS
16V(1608)
R6590
16V(1608) 6.5 3.3
0 3.3 4.9 3.2
56K
5
4
12
AGND SCLK
5
FROM JACK
(2125)
C6555 10 C 5.0 1.2 C6566 R6572 C6584 R6556
DVI_A_IN_R
11
VA MCLK DVD_R DVD-H
6
1B 100
R6569
C6556 0.1 B 1 B 100 AV1_Y
R6582
100
12.288MHz 16V(1608)
56K
3.3 3.3 16V(1608)
10
VD LRCK AV1_C
7
X6551
100DT01217 AV1_A_IN_L
0 3.3 NC
DGND SDTO AV1_A_IN_R
8
2 1
5 C6559 10 C (2125)
SW_Y_IN DVI_A_IN_L 5
3 4 Y SW IC DVI_A_IN_R
C6560 0.1 B
IC6554 MM1501XNRE
FCM1608KF-102T02
FCM1608KF-102T02
OUT VCC YUV_A_IN_L

C6574
0/3.3 4.5 AV1_Y YUV_A_IN_R
FCM1608KF-102T02
6
B6552
B6553
L
10 C
BUFFER 2125
4.5 0
B6554
5
RESET_N C6575
5.0 VCC
H 4.5 DVD_Y
4
NR6551 10 C
CRA108470JV 2125
MCLK
SDOUT
LRCK
DVD-H
BCLK
4 B6556
4
D5.0V
BLM18PG181SN1D
C6569
1 B
FROM MICON
RESET_N
SW_C_IN
C SW IC
IC6555 MM1501XNRE
C6577
0/3.3 4.5 AV1_C
6
L
10 C
FROM REGULATOR
BUFFER 2125
4.5 0
3 3
5
DVD_Y
C6576
5.0 VCC
H 4.5 DVD_C DVD_C
4
10 C DVD_L
2125
DVD_R
SW+12V
GND
D3.3V
D5.0V
2 2
PCBDH0
CEG360
1 NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED 1
A B C D E F G H
H-27 H-28
A B C D E F G H
REGULATOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8
IC
FROM/TO POWER VCC1.0V DC/DC
CP3001 (CP501) R3016 R3018

TWG-P23P-A1 L3001
D3005 D3007
AT+5.8V 1.8K +-1% 150 +-1% TO HDMI
23 KEY-A NC
EC11FS4 EC11FS4 22uH
22 KEY-B NC TSL0808 D3.3V
21 POWER_FAIL POWER_FAIL VDD CORE 1.05V IC D5.0V
20 INVERTER_H BLON IC3001 BD9130NV
C3056
GND
1 B
7 19 LIGHT_CTL VDIM 0.8 3.0 7
R3005 ADJ EN
8
REG_SW LV_CTL (typ 1.8A)
18 POWER_ON-H 3.3 3.3
VCC PVCC L3002
7
1K
17 DTV_POWER_ON-H NC 0.3 1.0 B3003 D1.0V FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO
ITH SW
6
R3008
BLM18PG181SN1D
10K
16 GND 0 0 5.2uHCDRH104R
GND PGND
5
S1_DET
4.7K +-1%
15 GND
0.1 B
R3009
AT+3.3V
C3015
6.3V(2125)
6.3V(2125)
10V(2125)
10V(2125)
10V(2125)
C3031
C3029
22 B
C3024
C3026
C3027
680P CH
14 GND VDIM
10 C
10 C
10 C
22 B
C3016
D3.3V
13 GND
TWIRE_TXDC
for LCD PANEL
12 GND GND TWIRE_RXDC
B3008 D3006 LCD-H
11 P.CON+3.8V NC R3002 BLM18PG181SN1D EC31QS04
B3011 VDD_PANEL GND GND
10 P.CON+3.8V NC
BLM18PG181SN1D 6.8K 0 5.2 5.2 D3002
9 AT+5.8V TO TUNER
B3012 3 2 1 EC31QS04
AT+5.8V
C3003
1 B
8 AT+5.8V G D D
BLM18PG181SN1D R3037 TUNER+30V
6 7 AT+5.8V LCD+B_SW D3.3V 6
B3010 0 LCD+B_SW
AT+12V Q3009 1K NC 5.8 D5.0V
6 AT+12V LCD-H Q3005 0
S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG
BLM18PG181SN1D RTQ035P02 GND
3.3V REGULATOR IC
KRC102SRTK 3 2 1
R3010
5 AT+12V 3.0
8.2K
B3009 S D D
TUNER+30V 0
4 P.CON+31V NC GND SW
BLM18PG181SN1D 4 5 6
IC3009
TO FLASH
0.33 B
3 POP_MUTE
C3002
NC 5.8 5.2 5.2
W861 FILTER_MUTE
2 FILTER_MUTE D3.3V
W812
C3004
S1_DET
1 B
1 S_DET IN OUT BLON
4 5 GND
5.8 3.3
TO LVDS
AT+5.8V AT+3.3V
AT+5.8V D3.3V
5.0V REGULATOR IC D1.0V
C3054
C3055
4.7 B
4.7 B
IC3007 BD7820FP VDD_PANEL
5 GND 5
FROM/TO MICON
LV_CTL
GND
OUT
CTL
ADJ
IN SYS_POWER_H
3.3V_POWER_H
1 2 6 4 5 AT+3.3V
5.8 5.8 0 5.0 0.8 IR_REMO
POWER_FAIL
R3031 R3032 DVD_RESET
REG_SW START_SW
VCC+3.3V DC/DC
10K 3.9K AT+5.8V
+-1% B3014 D5.0V L3004 D5.0V
BLM18PG181SN1D AT+12V 22uHCDRH104R GND
R3033
for CORE
+-1%
W832 470 R3022
FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO
BLM18PG181SN1D
BLM18PG181SN1D
L3005
C3038
C3039
5.8 3.3 3.3

2125
1 B
10 B
12.0 12.0 SW+12V 0.047 1/4W 2125

4 CP3002 AT+5.8V 4 5 6 4
R3034
R3041
+-1%
Q3011 TPC6108
A2006WV0-2X11P SW C3013 R3020
22K
220
W847 22uH
DVD_SPDIF 0 S D D
B3004
Q3007 TO SCALER POWER
DC DC FET
B3005
1 SPDIF-134 TSL0808
W849 KTA1664-Y(GP) 0.047 1/4W 2125
R3014
ZERO_MUTE 6.3V 68 CD
2 ZERO
3.3K
R3045
R3042
D3.3V
4.7K
4.7K
3 GND VDD CORE 1.8V IC
W852 DVD_RESET IC3002 AL1015 G D D D1.8V
4 DVD_RESET SW D1.0V
C3014 5.8 C3019 3 2 1
5 GND SW 0 Q3004 5.8 GND
VIN CS
0.001 B
B3006
8
6.2 3.3 3.3
C3021
W853 START_SW Q3008 2.8 KRC103SRTK 0.1 B
6 START_SW 0.1 B 4.5 1.2
KRC102SRTK V5/PWON EXT
7
B3022 TWIRE_TXDC BLM18PG181SN1D
7 TX 1.2 0
0 4.5 Vref/SS GND TO AV SWITCH
6
FCM1608KF-102T02 R3024 R3025 B3007
8 GND 0 1.2 1.3 D3.3V
CC FB
5
27P CH
EC31QS04
R3019
DVD+3.3V BLM18PG181SN1D DVD_R
C3017
B
4V 82 CD
1.5K 220
C3012
33K
9 P.CON+3.3V
R3023
D3004
C3022
DVD_L
+-1%
+-1% +-1%
1K
0.47
10 GND 0 DVD_Y
R3043
MOTOR+6V 3.3V_POWER_H DVD_C
11 P.CON+6V
R3035 SW+12V
3 B3015 1K 0 3
12 GND D5.0V
W850 DVD_R 0 5.2 5.2 3.3 D3.3V
13 DVD_A_OUT_R 6.8K BLM18PG181SN1D B3017
DVD+3.3V
0.1 B
GND
C3011
W851 DVD_L 3 2 1 SW
14 DVD_A_OUT_L 6.3V 220 V-S BLM18PG181SN1D
W856 G D D Q3003 0
DVD_Y 0 TO DDR
15 [V]Y_VIDEO KRC103SRTK
0.33 B
C3043
LCD+B_SW
R3040
W857
C3040
C3041
1 B
DVD_C 2.8
8.2K
16 [U]C_VIDEO LCD+B_SW Q3010 D1.8V

Q3006 RTQ035P02 GND
17 GND
B3023 0 KRC102SRTK
TWIRE_RXDC S D D
18 RX TO JACK
FCM1608KF-102T02 4 5 6
19 P.CON+3.3V L3003
B3016 5.8 5.2 5.2 (DDR2:typ 1095mA)
SW+12V D1.8V D3.3V
20 P.CON+12V
ZERO_MUTE
C3042
B3013
1 B
FCM1608KF-102T02 22uH
21 P.CON+A5V D5.0V
6.3V 330 V-S

MOTOR_GND BLM18PG181SN1D 1.8V_REGULATOR IC TSL0808
22 DVD_SPDIF
GND(M) IC3003
FILTER_MUTE
C3048
PQ035ZN1HZPH V_IN VB V_OUT V_ADJ GND
AT+5.8V
(CP8501,CP8502) AT+5.8V 1 2 6 4 5
R3038
2 GND 2
75
TO DVD PCB 3.0 3.3 1.8 1.3 0

CD3002 5.8 5.8 R3003 D3003 GND
AT+5.8V REG_SW
10P CH
10P CH
SW
2.2K EC31QS04
R3039
E82M1101 Q3002
75
0 R3007 R3015 R3017

KRA101SRTK D3.3V
0
100 6.8K 150
16V 10 V-S
3.3
C3065
C3066
SYS_POWER_H
C3047
+-1% +-1%
C3023
2.2 B
R3013
C3018
2.2 B
3.3K
R3004
4.7K
SW
0
Q3001 PCBDH0
KRC102SRTK CEG360

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
1
1
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES
A B C D E F G H
H-29 H-30
A B C D E F G H
POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (POWER PCB) 8
12M 1W
R503
KX
KX
TO BACKLIGHT INVERTER
0.001
INV+B
C507
C510
250V 0.001
INV+B
TH501_1 T501_1 INV_GND
250V
INV_GND
W828
81240018
J501 POWER_ON_H LIGHT_CTL
CCT2302-0901C 5D2-08LCS 169.0 12.0
P201-2476-2 W808 1 12 INVERTER_H
CD501
275V 0.22 ECQUL
275V 0.1 ECQUL

7 P201-2476-2 D508 D510 5.8 7
W807
ENE241D-10A-Q6
NC NC 2 11 DC-DC CONVERTER
1.2M 1W RCR
SW D520
1
4 3 RM11C-EIC RM11C-EIC IC503 TO SOUND AMP
200V 270 KXW

C506
C508
R509
Q503
D504
0 LA5797M-TE-L-E
169.0
25V 0.15 B
3 10 KRA103MAT C538 MA111
C545
C502
2 1 D507 D518 12.0 0
V_IN VRET POWER_ON_H
8
2
NC F501 12.0 12.0 25V 0.15 B D519

RM11C-EIC RM11C-EIC 0
51MS040L 9 SOUND+B
W810 D515 0 0 0 MA111
L501 RB095T-90 EN CPOUT SOUND_GND
7
D522
SS24H-10100 0 12.0 SW GND
C531
25V 1 B
4A125V 5 8 L503
1
FH501 FH502 W836 Q504 0
25V 0.15 B
C539 MA111
1W
AT+5.8V
C546
2
KRC103MAT0 NC NC GND
6
EYF-52BCY EYF-52BCY
R510
22uH
R533
3
0 0 FILTER_MUTE
10K
6 7 TSL0808 25V 0.15 B D521
0.22
1.3 P.CON+32V
1F5-E
D505
3.0 NC NC FB
5
R551 MA111 TO JACK OUT
0 R536 R543
4A 125V
SWITCHING D523 100 1/4W S_DET
220K 47K
400V 0.022 PP
Q501 RB095T-90 GND
56K 1W
22K 1/2W 22K 1/2W
6 STF10NK50Z D 169.0 6
R512
C543_1 1 B 50V(21-25)
2KV 470P R
C518
1
R504
20.0 G
C513
AT+12V
10V 2200 ZL
3
S 1.8
16V 1000 ZL
33 1/4W
R505_1
C504
L504
R506
33K HS502 HS503
C525
AT+5.8V
100 1/4W
R501
763WAA0381 763WAA0381
R518
C511_1
16V 1000
SARS01-V1
16V 220
10uH
5mm
ZL
MHE
C512
(21-25) TSL0808
D512
R502 1.5 1/4W +-1% NC NC
R544
GND
150 B501
(21-25)
R545 1.5 1/4W +-1% W4BRH3.5X6X1.0 D516 C520
100 1/4W
R531
10K 1/4W
(21-25) 1H3-E
10K
50V 4.7 YXF POWER FAIL SW
R521
1.5 1/4W +-1%
R538
R546 5.8 Q505
C517 D517 R529 KTA1504S_Y_RTK
(21-25)
100 1/4W
R547 1.5 1/4W +-1% 330P B 5.8

D506
R507
1H3-E
MTZJ8.2B 2.2K 1/4W

4.0 R535
5 D511
POWER_FAIL 5
POWER CONTORL 8.2K 1/4W
IC501 D514 W835
1H3-E SOUND+B
FA5531P-A2
16V 1000 ZL
RU3AM-EIC
C522
5.7 169.0
ZCD VH
1
R513
82K
2.8 SOUND_GND
FB NC NC
2
R511
1.8 21.0
IS VCC
3
56 1/4W
50V 47 YXF 2.5mm
CH
B
C501
0 21.3
C503
GND OUT
22P CH
5
C505
330P
0.001
C516
UDZSNP33B
HS501 R517
B
C509_1
D509
4 763WAA0381 4
0.1
1K FROM/TO REGULATOR
R515
1K
470 +-1%
0.001 B
NC C521 R519
R524
C526
CP501 (CP3001)
FEED BACK 0.1 B C523_1 10K 127301123K2
IC505 S_DET S1_DET 1
PS2561AL1-1-V(W) 0.47 MMTS
FILTER_MUTE FILTER_MUTE 2
2.8 12.0
4
1
NC POP_MUTE 3
+-1%
P.CON+32V
R523
0 11.0 P.CON+32V 4
3
2
250V 470P KX
AT+12V AT+12V 5
2.7K
REGULATOR
AT+12V 6
IC502
AT+5.8V 7
KIA431A-AT
AT+5.8V AT+5.8V 8
C A REF
2.2K +-1%
AT+5.8V 9
3 3
R525
3 2 1 P/CON+3.3V
C514
P.CON+3.8V 10
16V 100 YK
11.0 0 2.5
P.CON+3.8V 11
C535
GND 12
GND GND 13
GND 14
GND 15
GND 16
NC DTV POWER ON_H17
POWER_ON_H POWER_ON-H 18
LIGHT_CTL LIGHT_CTL 19
INVERTER_H INVERTER_H 20
4A 125V POWER_FAIL POWER_FAIL 21
2 CAUTION: IS THE LIVE CONNECTION NC KEY-B 22 2
NC KEY-A 23
CAUTION:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,
REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE FUSE4A 125V (F501)
ATTENTION:POUR UNE PROTECTION CONTINUE LES RISQUES D’INCEIE
N’UTILISER QUE DES FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE 4A 125V (F501)
PCB240
CEG362
CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
1 NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED NOTE:THE RESISTOR MARKED F IS FUSE RESISTOR. CAUTION:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY
1
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST THE ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR MARKED NP
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL. DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
IS NON POLAR ONE. DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES
A B C D E F G H
H-31 H-32
A B C D E F G H
BACKLIGHT INVERTER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (POWER PCB) 8
HIGH VOLTAGE
6KV 10P SL
C7030
MA111
D7023
CD7005
B
CN1
C7031
E82E1303
MA111
R7049
0.022
D7019
T7001 IS_DET1 HV 1
D7014
8135113G
7 10 1/4W NC NC 2 7
FROM POWER MA111
R7045
MA111
12.4 3.1 NC NC 3
D7017
680
1 8 HV 1
NC NC 4
F7001 L7001 LV 2
12.6 0 NC NC 5
INV+B 2 7
VS_DET NC NC 6
1206FA5A-T 10uH
5A 32V TSL0808 12.6 0 LV 7
3 6 INV_SGND
22 1W
16V 470 ZL
LV 8
R7038
1SS133
D7018
R7046
C7006
680
MA111
3.1 NC NC 9
D7020
12.4
4 5 D7013 R7050
IS_DET2 NC NC 10
D7003 LV 2
DRIVE MA111 NC NC 11
MA111
10 1/4W
C7032
D7024
500V 0.0047 B
1SS133 Q7005 HV 1
NC NC 12
6KV 10P SL 0.022

TK30A06J3(ORION.Q) 12.4
C7017
INV_GND
D NC NC 13
R7035
CN2
W821 2.6 G
HV 14
6 22 1/4W 6
C7033
S
0
W819
D7006
HIGH VOLTAGE
1SS133 HIGH VOLTAGE
R7036_1
12.4
22 1W
R7039
22 1/4W
D
16V 470 ZL
2.6 G
C7020
DRIVE 0 S
500V 0.0047 B
Q7004
CD7006
C7018
TK30A06J3(ORION.Q)
CN3
E82E1303
T7002 HV_ 1
6KV 10P SL
5 8135113G 5
NC NC 2
C7026
12.4 3.1 NC NC 3 HV_ 1
1 8
NC NC 4 LV 2
MA111
D7025
INVERTER COTROL IC
12.6 0 NC NC 5
0.022 B
IC7001 BD9882FV-E2
C7027
2 7 R7051
MA111
IS_DET3 NC NC 6
D7021
2.1 3.4 C7011
16V 470 ZL
20
DUTY VCC 12.6 D7011 10 1/4W LV 7

1
C7022
1 B 3 6
LV 8
R7047
R7009 R7012 1.5 3.1 MA111
1SS133
680
D7015
19
BRT FAIL NC NC 9
2
C7012 12.4 3.1

47K +-1% 220 +-1% 4 5
NC NC 10
C7004 1.3 0 0.01 B R7023
LV 2
18
N1 NC 11
3
BCT VS_DET NC
0.047 B 10 1/4W HV_ 1
NC NC 12
R7010 1.5 0
INV_SGND
17
RT PGND NC NC 13
4
CN4
MA111
33K +-1%
D7016
HV_ 14
4 R7007 R7013 1.7 0 R7024 4
D7012
R7048
16
SRT N2
5
680
180K +-1% 82K 10 1/4W
C7003 1.1 C7008 MA111
0
D7022
MA111
0.022 B
R7052
C7028
15
CT
6
SCP IS_DET4
330P CH 0.47 B
R7020
100K
10 1/4W
MA111
0 0 C7009
D7026
14
INV GND SS
7
0.1 B
6KV 10P SL
0 3.1 C7010
C7029
13
FB REG
8
0.047
0.0047
C7007
0.1 B
C7002
B
B
0.1
12
IS COMP
9
0.001 B
R7017 R7019
0.001 B
R7053
R7054
C7034
C7035
680K
680K
1.5
0.1 10K 10K
10
11
VS STB C7025
R7018 D7002 1SS133
5.1
R7005
0.001 B
100
3 10K D7004 1SS133 3

R7014 R7044 330K
D7005 1SS133
FROM POWER 15K 1/4W R7043 330K 1/4W
R7011
FEED BACK 9.1 4.8 2.8 10.3 2.8 4.8 9.1 C7023
R7001 R7003 R7008 100K 1/4W 0
LIGHT_CTL D 3.7 Q7003 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0.001 B
R7056
2.7K 1/4W 4.7K 47K G 2SK3018T106
LM2902DR
Vcc
1SS133
D7010
R7002
C7001
4.7K 1/4W
0.1 B
18K
S
150 +-1% 4.7K +-1%
B
C7013 0.001 B
0
R7025
FEED_BACK IC
4.7K
0.01
56K +-1%
1SS133
D7001
1M
R7033
R7030
R7006
C7024
IC7002
1SS133
D7009
C7014
GND
5.6K
R7026
R7021
R7004 0.001 B
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
INVERTER_H 9.1 4.8 2.8 0 2.8 4.8 9.1
2 1K 1/4W R7041 2
R7042 330K
15K +-1%
15K 1/4W
15K 1/4W
15K 1/4W
15K 1/4W
R7032
1SS133
R7022
1SS133
D7007
R7027
R7028
R7029
D7008
330K 1/4W
B
C7015
0.001 B
R7034
C7016
C7019
0.001 B
R7037
R7040
680K
680K
680K
C7021
0.001
INV_SGND
VS_DET
IS_DET1
IS_DET2
IS_DET3
IS_DET4
IS_DET1
IS_DET2
IS_DET3
IS_DET4
0.001 B
PCB240
CEG362

1
A B C D E F G H
H-33 H-34
A B C D E F G H
SOUND AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (POWER PCB) 8
7 7
SOUND AMP IC
IC301 LA42052-E
6 6
Ripple
Filter IN1 GND IN2 STB P.P Vcc OUT2 NC GND NC OUT1 NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
7.4 1.6 0 1.6 1.6 10.3 14.0 7.4 NC 0 NC 7.4 NC HEADPHONE JACK
R308
FROM JACK OUT
J301
15 1K 1/4W PJ-364H
C303
LOUT_SOUND 5
W823 L
EC11FS2-TE12L
C301 1 B
D301
R304 R306 4
ROUT_SOUND R309 B308
1 B 2
2.2K 2.2K R310 1K 1/4W HCB3216KF-391T20
B307
3
R305 R307 W820 1K 1/4W HCB3216KF-391T20
16 6
5 R 5
MHE
2.2K 2.2K
16V 470 MHE

7
R311
1
FROM POWER
C310
C311
1K 1/4W
16V 470
S803X
C319 C320 B303

SPEAKER
FILTER_MUTE 0.0068 B 0.0068 B HCB3216KF-391T20
R302 CD301 E8142403
SP301
SP OUT L 4 4 S0308F01
6.8K 1/4W W824
SOUND+B GND 3 3
W827
6.3V 220 MHE

SPEAKER
35V 470 MHE

GND 2 2
16V 100 MHE
POWER_ON_H
CH
0.0022 CH
SP OUT R 1 1
4.7 B
C309
C306
C304
C305
C308
C307
SP302
S0308F01
0.0022
W803
4 HS301 4
763WSA0064
SOUND_GND
W806
GND
AT+5.8V
R313
22K
5.8 SW
5.8 R314
5.8 Q302
1.6 SW 470 1/4W KRC102SRTK
Q301 3.0
KTA1504S_Y_RTK 0
3 3
2 2
PCB240
CEG362
CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

1
A B C D E F G H
H-35 H-36
A B C D E F G H
JACK OUT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (POWER PCB) 8
W839
S803Y
JACK_GND
7 7
FROM/TO JACK
COMPONENT_VIDEO_IN
CP8101 (CP4301) J8102
RCA-341H(NI)-09
127301123K2
LOUT_SOUND R8118
E
23 LOUT AV3_Y
1
22 GND 100
ROUT_SOUND R8119
E
21 ROUT AV3_PB
3
20 GND 100
AV1_C R8120
6 H
E
19 AV1_C AV3_PR
5
6
18
17
GND
AV1_Y AV1_Y (OPERATION PCB) 100
6
100P CH
100P CH
100P CH
C8102
C8105
C8110
R8103
R8105
R8108
75
75
75
16 GND
AL2/YUV_A_IN_L TO MICON
15 YUV L IN
14 GND CP2201 (CP6202)
13 YUV R IN AR2/YUV_A_IN_R A2001WR2-3P
R2201 R2202 S_DET R8110 1K W822
12 GND KEY_A 3
R2203 R2204 R2205 R2206
AV1_CVBS 1K 820
11 CVBS1 KEY_B 2
AV1_Y R8111 100
15K 5.6K 5.6K 820
10 GND GND 1
AL1 Y
CH DOWN/STOP
9 AV1 L IN
EVQ21505R
VOL DOWN
CH UP/PLAY
EVQ21505R
EVQ21505R
EVQ21505R
EVQ21505R
EVQ21505R
EVQ21505R
EVQ21505R
SW2204
1
POWER
8 GND
INPUT
SW2201
SW2202
SW2203
SW2205
SW2206
SW2207
SW2208
5
VOL UP
MENU
EJECT
AR1
7
7 AV1 R IN
S-DET
6
2
6 GND
5 AV3_V AV3_PR C
5 AV1_C R8112 100 5
4 GND S-VIDEO-IN
AV3_PB
100P CH
100P CH
J8101
C8103
C8109
3 AV3_U
R8104
R8107
PCB270
75
75
DIN-417HA-01
2 GND CEG363
1 AV3_Y AV3_Y
COMPONENT_AUDIO_IN
J8103
RCA-228H(3)NI-02
R8113 1K
E
AL2/YUV_A_IN_L
1
R8114 1K
E
AR2/YUV_A_IN_R
3
470P CH
5
470P CH
C8107
C8111
4 TO POWER (REMOCON PCB) 4
W815
GND
CVBS_AV_IN
W804 J8104
RCA-341H(2)NI-06
FROM/TO MICON
Vout 1
E
S_DET AV1_CVBS R8115 100 V
1
GND 2
R7602 47
B+ 3 CP7601 (CP6203) 1K
E
AL1 R8116 L
A2001WR2-5P
3
R7605 100
OS7601 REMOCON IN 1
TO SOUND AMP
STAND BY/POWER
R7604
6 H
E
ROM-V338TAO GND 2 R8117 1K
390
AR1
5
LTL-1BEFJ-002A
6.3V 100 KA
AT+5V 3
D7601
470P CH
470P CH
470P CH
7
C7602
R7603
C8104
C8106
C8108
NC
R8106
LOUT_SOUND STANDBY 4
390
75
3 ROUT_SOUND
POWER ON LED 5 3
PCBDA0
CEG364
2 2
PCB240
CEG362

1
A B C D E F G H
H-37 H-38
A B C D E F G H
SW SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
8 8
7 7
(SW PCB)
6 6
SW2
CD2301 ESE22MH22
2H061605
1 GND(SW)
2 PICK UO INNER LIMIT SWITCH
3 FEED MOTOR(-) M M2602
4 FEED MOTOR(+) BCZ3B05
5 SPINDLE MOTOR(-)
6 SPINDLE MOTOR(+) M2601
M JCV9B12
5 5
PCB640
DED020
4 4
3 3
2 2
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
1 1
A B C D E F G H
H-39 H-40
A B C D E F G H
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
8 8
SPEAKER
CD301 CP501 CP3001 CP3002 CP8501 CP2301_1
SP301
7 1 1 SP OUT R
4 3
S_DET 1 1 1 1 S_DET SPDIF-134 1 1 SPDIF-134 GND 1 1 1 1 DSM2(06SD) 7
2 2 GND FILTER_MUTE 2 2 2 2 FILTER_MUTE ZERO 2 2 GND F 2 2 2 2
2 1
S-VIDEO-IN
SPEAKER 3 3 GND NC POP_MUTE 3 3 3 3 POP_MUTE NC GND 3 3 ZERO Vref 3 3 3 3
J8101
4 4 SP OUT L P.CON+31V 4 4 4 4 P.CON+31V DVD_RESET 4 4 DVD_A_OUT_R VCC 4 4 4 4 SLOT IN DVD
SP302 6 5
AT+12V 5 5 5 5 AT+12V GND 5 5 GND E 5 5 5 5 DRIVE
D-SUB HDMI CONNECTOR
7 DK1
AT+12V 6 6 6 6 AT+12V CP4303 CP3602 START_SW 6 CD3002 6 DVD_A_OUT_L D 6 6 6 6
CD7005 CV_VTM101A
AT+5.8V 7 7 7 7 AT+5.8V 1 VGA-R 24 TX 7 7 DVD RESET C 7 7 7 7
1 HV 8 OPTICAL PICK-UP
AT+5.8V 8 8 8 8 AT+5.8V 2 VGA-G 23 GND 8 8 [Y]_VIDEO SW1(DVD/CD) 8 8 8
2 NC
COMPONENT_VIDEO_IN
AT+5.8V 9 9 9 9 AT+5.8V 3 VGA-B 22 P.CON+3.3V 9 9 [V]Y_VIDEO VRF(RF_OUT) 9 9 9 9
3 NC
E
P.CON+3.8V 10 10 10 10 P.CON+3.8V NC 4 NC NC 21 NC NC GND 10 10 [U]C_VIDEO B 10 10 10 10
1
1 HV 4 NC P.CON+3.8V
CN1 P.CON+3.8V 11 11 11 11 NC 5 DGND 20 NC NC P.CON+6V 11 11 START_SW A 11 11 11 11
J8102
2 LV 5 NC
E
GND 12 12 12 12 GND GND 12 12 GND VR(DVD) 12 12 12 12
6 AGND 19 HOT PLUG
3
6 NC
GND 13 13 13 13 GND 7 AGND 18 +5V_POWER DVD_A_OUT_R 13 13 SSCTXD/RX VR COM 13 13 13 13
6 7 LV 6
6 H
E
GND 14 14 14 14 GND 8 AGND 17 DDC_GND DVD_A_OUT_L 14 14 SSCRXD/TX VR(CD) 14 14 14 14 SPINDLE MOTOR
5
8 LV GND
GND 15 15 15 15 9 NC NC 16 DDC_SDA [V]Y_VIDEO 15 GND 15 15 15 15
9 NC
GND 16 16 16 16 GND 10 DGND 15 DDC_SCL [U]C_VIDEO 16 CP8502 LD(CD) 16 16 16 16
COMPONENT_AUDIO_IN
2 LV 10 NC
CN2 NC DTV POWER ON_H17 17 17 17 DTV_POWER_ON-HNC 11 NC NC 14 RESERVED NC GND 17 1 GND PD/GND 17 17 17 17
1 HV 11 NC
POWER_ON-H 18 18 18 18 POWER_ON-H RX 18 2 P.CON+3.3V LD(DVD) 18 18 18 18
H
12 DDCD NC 13 CEC NC
E
12 NC
2
LIGHT_CTL 19 19 19 19 LIGHT_CTL P.CON+3.3V 19 3 P.CON+3.3V GND 19 19 19 19 LOADING MOTOR

13 VGAHS 12 TMDS_CLK-
J8103
13 NC
H
INVERTER_H 20 20 20 20 INVERTER_H 14 VGAVS 11 TMDS_CLK_SH P.CON+12V 20 4 P.CON+12V NC NC 20 20 20 20

4
14 HV
POWER_FAIL 21 21 21 21 POWER_FAIL 15 DDCC NC 10 TMDS_CLK+ P.CON+A5V 21 5 GND T DRV 21 21 21 21
5
HIGH VOLTAGE
NC KEY-B 22 22 22 22 KEY-B NC 9 TMDS_DATA0- GND(M) 22 6 P.CON+A5V T RTN 22 22 22 22
CD7006 SLED MOTOR
NC KEY-A 23 23 23 23 KEY-A NC CP2803 8 TMDS_DATA0_SH 7 P.CON+6V F DRV 23 23 23 23
1 HV_
1 TCK 7 TMDS_DATA0+ CP2801 8 GND(M) F RTN 24 24 24 24
2 NC
CP8101 CP4301
H
1 HV_ 3 NC 2 TRST_N 6 TMDS_DATA1- GND 1

5 CN3 CP2303 5
2
AV3_Y 1 1 1 1 AV3_Y
2 LV 4 NC 3 TDO 5 TMDS_DATA1_SH SCL 2
GND 2 2 2 2 GND SP1+ 1 1 1 1
CVBS_AV_IN
H
5 NC 4 ASEBRKAK_N 4 TMDS_DATA1+ SDA 3

SP1- 2 2 2 2
4
AV3_U 3 3 3 3 AV3_U
J8104
6 NC 5 TMS 3 TMDS_DATA2- IIC_OFF 4

GND 4 4 4 4 GND SLD+ 3 3 3 3
6 H
7 LV 6 TDI 2 TMDS_DATA2_SH D_GND 5

SLD- 4 4 4 4
5
AV3_V 5 5 5 5 AV3_V
8 LV 7 RESET_N 1 TMDS_DATA2+ PC_TOOL_RX 6
GND LIMIT SW 5 5 5 5
7
GND 6 6 6 6 TU5801
8 FLASH_WP
NC
9 NC PC_TOOL_TX 7 6 6 6
AV1 R IN 7 7 7 7 AV1 R IN SW(GND) 6
2 LV 10 NC 9 ASEMD0 22 23 D3.3V 8
CN4 1 HV_ 11 NC
GND 8 8 8 8 GND
10 GND NC 1 NC(BB) NC NC/RESET 9 CP2302
AV1 L IN 9 9 9 9 AV1 L IN
12 NC 11 VDD33 LD+ 1 1 1 1
GND 10 10 10 10 GND NC 2 NC
13 NC POWER PCB 12 GND LD- 2 2 2 2
PCB240 CVBS1 11 11 11 11 CVBS1 3 3
14 HV_ SUB MICON NC 3 NC CP2804 GND(D) 3 3
CEG362 GND 12 12 12 12 GND CP6201 DVD MT PCB
VDD+5V/+3.3V 1 OPEN 4 4 4 4
YUV R IN 13 13 13 13 YUV R IN 1 GND PCB130
NC 4 NC VDD+5V/+3.3V 2 DMG097 CLOSE 5 5 5 5
4 GND 14 14 14 14 GND 2 TX
4
GND 3
YUV L IN 15 15 15 15 YUV L IN 3 MODE 5 SIF-out
GND 4
HEADPHONE JACK GND 16 16 16 16 GND 4 NC NC
RXO3+ 5
J301
P201-2476-2 AV1_Y 17 17 17 17 AV1_Y 5 VCC RXOC+ 6
CD501 J501 GND 18 18 18 18 GND 6 CNVSS NC 7 AGC RXO2+ 7
NC AV1_C 19 19 19 19 AV1_C 7 RX
RXO1+ 8
1
GND 20 20 20 20 GND 8 NC NC 8 V_OUT

RXO0+ 9
ROUT 21 21 21 21 ROUT 9 RESET
9 +5V GND 10
GND 22 22 22 22 GND 10 GND
2
NC RXE3+ 11
LOUT 23 23 23 23 LOUT 11 GND
R
L
RXEC+ 12
5
4
2
3
6
7
1
RXE2+ 13
NC 11 TU LVDS
RXE1+ 14 CD2804
3 RXE0+ 15
3
CD6202 12 +30V
CP2201
VDD+5V/+3.3V 16
GND 1 1 1 1 GND
OPERATION PCB GND 17
KEY B 2 2 2 2 KEY B V2801_1
PCB270 GND 18
CEG363 KEY A 3 3 3 3 KEY A 14 SDA
GND 19 LCD PANEL
15 SCL RXO3- 20
RXOC- 21
16 AFT RXO2- 22
COMMAND TRANSMITTER
OS7601 CP7601 CD6203

STAND BY/POWER 1 1 HDMI AUDIO IN RXO1- 23
REMOCON IN 1 1 REMOCON IN 17 +5V
D7601 J4302 RXO0- 24
1 Vout GND 2 2 2 2 GND
TM101
GND 25
G
2 GND
R
AT+5V 3 3 3 3 AT+5V NC 18 IF_OUT

3 B+ 4 4 RXE3- 26
STANDBY 4 4 STANDBY LED
2 POWER ON LED 5 5 5 5 P.ON LED
19 IF_AGC RXEC- 27 2
COAXIAL RXE2- 28
J4301 20 IF_O
IF_OUT1
REMOCON PCB DIGITAL PCB RXE1- 29
PCBDA0 PCBDH0 21 IF_OUT2 RXE0- 30
R
H
L
CEG364 CEG360
2
1
1
7
6
3
2
4
5
24 25
1 1
A B C D E F G H
H-41 H-42
WAVEFORMS
MICON AV SWITCH
20ns 10us 2ms
200mV 100mV 100mV
1 7 13
SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO TUNER

20us 10us 2ms
500mV 0.5V 100mV
2 8 14
FLASH SOUND AMP

10us 20ns 1ms
0.5V 200mV 200mV
3 9 15
10us 20ns 1ms

200mV 200mV 200mV
4 10 16
JACK MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP
20us 2ms 10ns
500mV 100mV 500mV
5 11 52
10us 2ms 100µs

100mV 100mV 500mV
6 12 53
NOTE: The following waveforms were measured at

the point of the corresponding balloon
number in the schemtic diagram.
I-1
WAVEFORMS
MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP
200ns
1.0V
54
MEMORY
100µs
500mV
55
AUDIO/VIDEO
200µs
1.0V
56
200µs
1.0V
57
10µs
200mV
58
10µs
100mV
59
NOTE: The following waveforms were measured at

the point of the corresponding balloon
number in the schemtic diagram.
I-2
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
208
103
209
103B
103C PCB270 210 210
107
(OPERATION PCB ASS'Y)
103A 109 112
111
103D 110
210
208
123 102D
210 102E 102D
206
206 203 102A

203
118 102E
PCB130
(DVD MT PCB ASS'Y)
102B
PCBDA0 208
208
(REMOCON PCB ASS'Y) 210
208 206
102C 102
105 208
119
208 PCB240
208 122 (POWER PCB ASS'Y)
207 208
PCBDH0 208 120
114
113 (DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y) 104F 205
116 208
207 104D
104E 203
208
208 208 202 204
204 202
115 115 203
208 208
104E
104D 204
121
208 108
208 104D
117 202
201
208 208 101C 204
104D
101F 104C
104B
101E
101F
101F
104A
106
101A 104
101F
101D
101F 101F
Note: Hinge Ass'y (106) is not included in Stand Ass'y (104).
101
124 101B
J1-1 J1-2
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
(PACKING DIAGRAM)
129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 134,

CD501, TM101
137
137
135
136
128
126
125 127
125
J1-3
DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW
600 608
601
608
CD2001
M2602
603
606
703
Do not replace the parts. Because,
minute adjustments are needed if
605 this condition is disassembled
702 further more.
703 AA 702 If the repair is needed, replace the
605
607 DVD MECHA ASS'Y.
703
701
602 604
SW2 704
PCB640
(SW PCB ASS'Y)
705
CD2301
CLASS MARK NOTE: Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.
Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.
GREASE AA
J2-1
MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description
101 AE009850 7A708A032A FRONT CABI ASS'Y
101A AE009851 708WPDA024 CABINET FRONT
101B AE009640 702WNBA011 SHEET SPEAKER
101C AE009571 713WPAA280 GLASS LED
101D AE007694 7235490068 BADGE BRAND
101E AE009684 761WPAA196 COVER STAND
101F AE009671 800WQ0A073 FELT SHEET
102 AE009852 7A702A631A BACK CABI ASS'Y

102A AE009853 702WPAB281 CABINET BACK
102B AE009577 761WSAA102 ANGLE HINGE
102C AE009578 761WSA0634 ANGLE BACK
102D AE003026 800WQ0A079 FELT SHEET
102E AE007708 800WQ00095 FELT SHEET
103 AE009854 7A711A082A PANEL SIDE ASS'Y

103A AE009855 711WPDA797 PANEL SIDE
103B AE009581 711WPEA001 SLOT DVD
103C AE009645 735WPAB117 BUTTON FRAME
103D AE008459 800WQ00105 FELT SHEET
104 AE009646 7A704A090A STAND ASS'Y

104A AE009647 704WPAA068 STAND
104B AE009648 761WPAA189 COVER HINGE
104C AE009649 761WSAA103 ANGLE STAND
104D AE009624 800SRA0002 CUSHION LEG VEB1349-A
104E AE008947 899NAGCL14 CABLE CLAMP
104F AE007710 89900FB118 BAND
105 AE009790 761WSA0679 ANGLE MPEG

106 AE009590 706KSAA001 HINGE ASS'Y
107 AE009650 706WPA0034 COVER CONNECTOR
108 AE009625 8900P3545B RIVET
109 AE009857 722549A739 SHEET RATING
110 AE009416 723000D607 MERCURY CAUTION LABEL (TOSHIBA)

111 AE009652 723000D807 SHEET JACK-1
112 AE009653 723000D808 SHEET JACK-2
113 AE001853 8965TS1017 CUSHION 65TS10-10(17.5*20*14)
114 AE005122 726000A073 SHEET CAUTION
115 AE009597 744WUA0029 SPRING EARTH-2
116 AE009627 899RFPC25V HOLDER CORD
117 AE009858 753WUA0101 SPRING EARTH-1
118 AE009600 761WPAA180 HOLDER REMOCON
119 AE009676 761WPAA185 HOLDER SPEAKER-L
120 AE009677 761WPAA188 HOLDER SPEAKER-R

121 AE009629 761WPA0515 HOLDER PCB
122 AE009859 752WSAA154 SHIELD IC
123 AE009679 800WQ0A119 FELT SHEET
124 AE009678 723549A091 POP LABEL
125 AE009680 792WHAA251 PACKAGE BOTTOM
126 AE009860 793WCDD862 GIFT BOX
127 AE009603 794WHA0003 HANDLE
128 AE009604 794WHA0004 HANDLE STOPPER
129 AE009631 890CCOR003 CLEANING CLOTH PACK
130 AE009609 JB5ND000 POLYBAG,INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION)

131 AE007451 J3N51617A REGISTRATION CARD
132 AE007627 J5S10229A INFORMATION SHEET(RETURN)USA
133 AE009861 J50S0101D INSTRUCTION BOOK
134 AE009862 J50S0107C QUICK SET-UP SHEET(SPANISH)
135 AE009842 791WHAA240 LAMIFILM BAG
136 AE009682 792WHAA268 PAD FOAM
137 AE009683 792WHAA250 PACKAGE TOP
201 AE003528 8110630A0U SCREW TAP TITE(P) BRAZIER 3*10 CH

202 AE005140 810A14080U SCREW WASHER(A) M4*8 CH
203 AE005675 810923060U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*6 CH
204 AE009612 8110K3080U SCREW TAP TITE(P) LAMI HEAD 3*8 CH
205 AE007747 814623080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*5.7+4*2.3 CH
206 AE003526 810923080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*8 CH
207 AE003524 8109I30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH7 3*10 CH
208 AE004849 8109230A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 CH
209 AE004847 8117540A6U SCREW TAPPING(B0) TRUSS 4*16 CH
210 AE009655 8109230A4U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*14 CH
K1-1
DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
! 600 AE009615 A50N01P650 DVD MECHA ASS'Y A50N01P650
601 AE008499 92SBB0033A LOADER SUB ASS'Y DLM1D29-31

602 AE005815 92AAA0017A FEED RACK ASS'Y
603 AE003551 92P100088A GEAR,MOTOR
604 AE005805 92P100117A GEAR,MIDDLE
605 AE008500 92P200017A INSULATOR, F
606 AE008501 92P200018A INSULATOR, R
607 AE005816 92P100116A GEAR,FEED
608 BZ710149 800WFAA008 CUSHION C
701 AE005817 92P700007A SCREW,GEAR FEED

702 AE003554 814011723U SCREW,PAN M1.7*2.3 P3 CH
703 AE003555 816112080U SEMS.TAP TITE(P) PAN W10 2*8 CH
704 AE005006 813381750U SCREW,T-TITE(B)CAMERA PAN M1.7*5.0 P3 CH
705 AE003557 811022080U SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2*8 CH
CD2001 AE009434 12C14O1602 CORD JUMPER FFC05241600408T1-A04

CD2301 AE003558 122H062102 CORD JUMPER 2H062102
M2602 AE009616 1515T98006 MOTOR WRF-300CA-10460A
PCB640 AE008503 A5X002C640 SW PCB ASS'Y DED020A
SW2 AE001158 0500101036 PUSH SWITCH ESE22MH22
K2-1
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
RESISTORS
! R503 75006901 RC31X1126J RC 12M OHM 1W
! R505 AE009485 R63884330J R,FUSE 33 OHM 1/4W
! R509 AE009486 RC31X1125J RC 1.2M OHM 1W
! R510 AE005735 R63881R22J R,FUSE 0.22 OHM 1W
! R512 AE009487 R3K781563J R,METAL OXIDE 56K OHM 1W
R551 BZ210272 R00204101J RC 100 OHM 1/4W
! R3019 AE009488 R808R9333J RC 33K OHM 1/16W
! R7038 AE009489 R3K781220J R,METAL OXIDE 22 OHM 1W
! R7039 AE009489 R3K781220J R,METAL OXIDE 22 OHM 1W
CAPACITORS
C502 AE009490 E8E52C271D CE 270 UF 200V
! C504 AE009184 E7EYF1222M CE 2200 UF 10V
! C506 BZ110025 P2122B224M CMP 0.22 UF 275V ECQUL
! C507 AD301026 CD39E0M13M CC 0.001 UF 250V
! C508 BZ110035 P2122B104M CMP 0.1 UF 275V ECQUL
! C510 AD301026 CD39E0M13M CC 0.001 UF 250V
C511 AE008913 E7EYF2102M CE 1000 UF 16V
! C513 BZ110176 C03L0R7Q2K CC 470 PF 2KV R
! C514 AE009491 CD39E0MQ2K CC 470 PF 250V
C518 AE009492 P332E4223J CPP 0.022 UF 400V
! C522 AE008913 E7EYF2102M CE 1000 UF 16V
! C525 AE008913 E7EYF2102M CE 1000 UF 16V
C535 AE009003 E7EPU2101M CE 100 UF 16V
C7026 AE009700 C234SLB11J CC 10 PF 6KV SL
DIODES
D301 AE008906 D28R11FS20 DIODE EC11FS2-TE12L
! D504 BZ410031 D6CE24110A DIODE VARISTA ENE241D-10A-Q6
D505 AE008372 D2LT001F50 DIODE SILICON 1F5-E
D506 AE008319 D4AT01H3E0 DIODE RECTIFIER 1H3-E
! D507 BZ410062 D2WTRM11C0 DIODE SILICON RM11C-EIC
D509 AE009494 DE7RB3302B DIODE ZENER UDZSNP33B TE-17
! D511 AE008319 D4AT01H3E0 DIODE RECTIFIER 1H3-E
D512 AE002133 D2BXARS010 DIODE SILICON SARS01-V1
! D514 BZ410126 D2WXRU3AM0 DIODE SILICON RU3AM-EIC
! D515 AE009495 D27A95T900 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER RB095T-90
D516 AE008319 D4AT01H3E0 DIODE RECTIFIER 1H3-E
D517 BZ410058 D97U08R21B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ8.2B T-77
D519 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
! D523 AE009495 D27A95T900 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER RB095T-90
D3002 AE004643 D28R1QS040 DIODE EC31QS04-TE12L
D3005 AE009496 D28R11FS40 DIODE SCHOTTKY EC11FS4-TE12L
D3007 AE009496 D28R11FS40 DIODE SCHOTTKY EC11FS4-TE12L
D3601 AE004937 D77R1A1R10 DIODE VARISTA AVRL161A1R1NT
D3602 AE004937 D77R1A1R10 DIODE VARISTA AVRL161A1R1NT
D3607 AE009497 DDLRS160T0 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER SS160-T
D3611 AE009498 DGJRT54WS0 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER BAT54WS
D6205 AE009498 DGJRT54WS0 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER BAT54WS
D7001 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77
K3-1
DIODES
D7601 AE000288 0021E9Q010 LED LTL-1BEFJ-002A
ICS
! IC301 AE008430 I03SP20520 SOUND AMP 5W 2CH LA42052-E
! IC501 AE009499 ICAD055310 LOW STANDBY POWER IC CONTROL FA5531P-A2
! IC502 AD302211 I1KJ9A431A VARIABLE SHUNT REGULATOR TAPE KIA431A-AT
IC503 AE009500 I03F9797M0 CHARGE POMP CONTROL LA5797M-TE-L-E
! IC505 AE002809 000220002W PHOTO COUPLER PS2561AL1-1-V(W)
! IC2301 AE008194 I03FV65650 5CH MOTOR DRIVER IC LA6565VR-TLM-E
IC2801 AE009656 I56M069540 SCALER R8J66954BG
IC2802 AE009502 IGGM061600 DDR2-667 256M CL=5 HYB18TC256160BF-3S
IC2804 AE009688 S50T01CF05 MEMORY DATA NOR FLASH 32M BOOT EN29LV320AB-70TCP
IC2805 AE009659 S50T01CE01 MEMORY DATA EEPROM 256K 12C M24256-BWMN6TP
! IC3001 AE009505 I07F091300 1CH DC-DC CONVERTER BD9130NV
! IC3002 AE008435 I1LF010150 DC-DC CONVERTER CONTROLLER AL1015
! IC3003 AE008916 I0GF95ZN10 VO=0.8-3.5V I=1.5A TAPING PQ035ZN1HZPH
! IC3007 AE008431 I07F078200 VARIABLE REG LOW INPUT IO=1A BD7820FP-E2
! IC3009 AE009506 I5HJ0170B0 REGULATOR VO=3.3V IO=800MA S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG
IC3602 AE009619 S50T01CE02 MEMORY DATA EEPROM 2K 12C S-24CS02AFJ-TB-GE
IC4001 AE009720 ICQK06966A VADDIS9 MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF-AMP ZR36966ELCG-D-G
IC4005 AE008324 IF9J0164AG 1M*16*4BANK(64M) 143MHZ SDRAM M12L64164A-7TG
IC4007 AE008437 ICMJ016017 NOR FLASH 16M B00T SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE
IC5801 AE004647 I01FF58320 USA STEREO AN5832SA-E1V
IC6201 79097849 I9UF032290 RESET IC 2.9V TYPE PST3229NR
IC6202 AE009620 S34L01PM01 MEMORY DATA FLASH MICOM ROM16K 2KX2 RAM1 R5F21124FP
IC6551 AE009511 IC1J053580 A/D CONVERTER AK5358A
IC6552 BZ611139 I0QF02534V A/V SW 3INPUT 1OUTPUT NJM2534V(TE2)
IC6554 AD301988 I0UF015010 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT MM1501XNRE
IC6555 AD301988 I0UF015010 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT MM1501XNRE
IC6556 AE008921 I5CJ031570 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT SN74LVC1G3157DCKR
IC7001 AE009512 I07F098820 19WLCD INVERTER IC BD9882FV-E2
IC7002 AE009513 I0CF0902D0 QUAND OPERATIONNAL AMPLIFILE LM2902DR
IC8501 AE009365 I0QF045650 DUAL OPEAMP NJM4565M(TE1)
! IC8502 AE008223 I1TF911170 VO=ADJ IO=1A TAPING LM1117S-ADJ
TRANSISTORS
Q301 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK
Q302 BZ510071 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK
! Q501 72783392 TJXG10NK50 FET STF10NK50Z
Q503 79097796 TPATC03002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA103MAT
Q504 AE000613 TNATC03002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103MAT
Q505 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK
Q2301 AE008330 TAAA1505SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P
Q2302 AE008331 TAAA1544T0 TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1544T-RTK/P
Q3002 BZ510107 TPAAA05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA101SRTK
Q3003 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK
Q3004 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK
! Q3007 AE009621 TL4A01664Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1664-Y(GP)
! Q3009 AE009514 TJ7T35P020 FET RTQ035P02-TR
Q3010 AE009514 TJ7T35P020 FET RTQ035P02-TR
! Q3011 AE008933 TJ5MC61080 FET TPC6108
Q3404 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK
Q3603 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL
Q3607 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL
Q3608 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL
Q5801 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL
Q5802 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL
Q5803 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL
Q5804 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL
K3-2
TRANSISTORS
Q6201 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL
Q6202 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL
Q6203 BZ510072 TPAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA103SRTK
Q7003 BZ510113 T27T030180 FET 2SK3018T106
Q7004 AE009516 T250A06J30 FET TK30A06J3(ORION.Q)
Q7005 AE009516 T250A06J30 FET TK30A06J3(ORION.Q)
COILS &TRANSFORMERS
! L501 AE005143 029X000416 COIL,LINE FILTER SS24H-10100
L503 BZ310150 02167E220K COIL 22 UH
L504 AD301785 02167E100K COIL 10 UH
L3001 BZ310150 02167E220K COIL 22 UH
L3002 AE009517 0218MG5R2P COIL 5.2 UH
L3003 BZ310150 02167E220K COIL 22 UH
L3004 AE009518 0218MG220P COIL 22 UH
L3005 BZ310150 02167E220K COIL 22 UH
L3603 AE009519 02D1000119 COIL CHOKE EXC28CG900U
L3604 AE009519 02D1000119 COIL CHOKE EXC28CG900U
L5801 72784092 0216SD220J COIL 22 UH
L5805 AE009260 021AS9224J COIL 0.22 UH
L6561 AE005284 0216S8220K COIL 22 UH
L7001 AD301785 02167E100K COIL 10 UH
L8501 AE008874 0216SD2R2J COIL 2.2 UH
L8502 AE006570 0216SD1R0J COIL 1 UH
L8504 AE006570 0216SD1R0J COIL 1 UH
! T501 AE009520 0481240018 TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING 81240018
! T7001 AE009660 048135113G TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING 8135113G
! T7002 AE009660 048135113G TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING 8135113G
JACKS
! J301 AE009522 060R131024 HEADPHONE JACK PJ-364H
! J501 AE009523 064Q1A0010 JACK,AC CCT2302-0901C
J4301 AE009524 060R401140 RCA JACK RCA-101HT(OR)
J4302 AE009522 060R131024 HEADPHONE JACK PJ-364H
J8101 AE009526 062R750007 PLUG DIN-417HA-01
J8102 AE009527 060R411058 RCA JACK RCA-341H(NI)-09
J8103 AE009528 060R431039 RCA JACK RCA-228H(3)NI-02
J8104 AE009529 060R431040 RCA JACK RCA-341H(2)NI-06
SWITCHES
SW2201 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R
P.C.BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PCB130 AE009848 A50T04C130 DVD MT PCB ASS'Y DMG097A
PCB240 AE009662 A50T01C240 POWER PCB ASS'Y CEG362A
PCB270 AE009663 A50T01C270 OPERATION PCB ASS'Y CEG363A
PCBDA0 AE009664 A50T01CDA0 REMOCON PCB ASS'Y CEG364A
PCBDH0 AE009665 A50T01CDH0 DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y CEG360A
MISCELLANEOUS
B303 AE009535 024HC13914 CORE,BEADS HCB3216KF-391T20
B501 BZ310129 024HT03564 CORE,BEADS W4BRH3.5X6X1.0
B2304 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45
B2800 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D
B2813 AE008394 024BC5121J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG121SN1D
K3-3
MISCELLANEOUS
B3016 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02
B4302 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06
BT001 AE008217 141U004016 BATTERY,MANGAN MNAAA(R03)
BT002 AE008217 141U004016 BATTERY,MANGAN MNAAA(R03)
CD301 AE009666 06E8142403 CORD CONNECTOR E8142403
! CD501 AE009636 120Q119907 CORD SET AC P201-2751-1
CP501 AE008882 06977NM020 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 127301123K2
CD2804 AE009539 06EA2U2503 CORD CONNECTOR EA2U2503
CD3002 AE009704 06E82M1102 CORD CONNECTOR E82M1102
CD6202 AE009541 06CH231204 CORD CONNECTOR CH231204
CD6203 AE009542 06CU251301 CORD CONNECTOR CU251301
CD7005 AE009849 06E82E1303 CORD CONNECTOR E82E1303
CD7006 AE009849 06E82E1303 CORD CONNECTOR E82E1303
CP2201 AD301795 069S230639 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WR2-3P
CP2301 AE008156 069KYOT159 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE LD07T2-24ND-03
CP2302 AE009544 069EV5T060 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 04_6232_105_015_800+
CP2303 AE009545 069EV6T060 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 04_6232_106_015_800+
CP2801 AE009546 06GG290029 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV-9A
CP2803 AE009547 06GG2C0029 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV-12A
CP2804 AE009548 069S2U0739 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2006WV0-2X15P
CP3001 AE008886 06CK7N0301 CORD CONNECTOR TWG-P23P-A1
CP3002 AE009549 069S2M0079 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2006WV0-2X11P
CP3602 AE009550 06GDYL3038 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 1A0300030
CP4301 AE008886 06CK7N0301 CORD CONNECTOR TWG-P23P-A1
CP4303 AE009551 06G7S21501 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE WD-00021-R
CP6201 AE009552 06GG2B0029 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV-11A
CP7601 BZ614440 069S250639 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WR2-5P
CP8101 AE008882 06977NM020 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 127301123K2
! CP8501 AE009553 06GG2E0019 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WR-14A
CP8502 AD301796 069S280629 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV2-8P
CUS151 BZ710279 800WFAA006 CUSHION A
EL2401 BZ614043 124116281A EYE LET XRY16X28BD
! F501 79101691 081PC04005 FUSE 51MS040L
! F7001 AE004626 083LA05007 FUSE 1206FA5A-T
FH501 AE002634 06710T0009 HOLDER,FUSE EYF-52BCY
FH502 AE002634 06710T0009 HOLDER,FUSE EYF-52BCY
NR2801 AE009554 11074100M7 R,NETWORK CRA108100JV
K3-4
MISCELLANEOUS
OS7601 AE008414 077A033001 REMOTE RECEIVER ROM-V338TAO
! SP301 AE009558 070Y433004 SPEAKER S0308F01
! SP302 AE009558 070Y433004 SPEAKER S0308F01
! TH501 AE009559 DSQDNE5R0L THERMISTOR 5D2-08LCS
TM101 AE009657 076D0LT040 TRANSMITTER 000-103000540
! TU5801 AE009623 0164100027 DIGITAL TUNER ENG36E18KRF
! V2801 AE009667 09EA122001 LCD T220SW01_VO
X2801 AE009563 100GT02728 CRYSTAL SMD-49 C27000B030
X2802 AE009564 100GT02509 CRYSTAL SMD-49 C25000H025
X3601 AE009565 100GT01807 CRYSTAL SMD-49 C18432B022
X4001 AE009566 100GT02727 CRYSTAL SMD-49 C27000J029
X6201 75006971 100GT01615 CRYSTAL B16000E007
X6551 AE009567 100DT01217 CRYSTAL DS0321SRAB
RESISTOR
RC...................CARBON RESISTOR
CAPACITORS
CC...................CERAMIC CAPACITOR
CE................... ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR
CP................... POLYESTER CAPACITOR
CPP.................POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR
CPL................. PLASTIC CAPACITOR
CMP................ METAL POLYESTER CAPACITOR
CMPL.............. METAL PLASTIC CAPACITOR
CMPP..............METAL POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR
K3-5
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
1-1, SHIBAURA 1-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 105-8001, JAPAN

Toshiba 22lv506 SVM PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Toshiba 22lv506 SVM PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

FILE NO.

22-inch Diagonal LCD TV/DVD

For (*1) and (*2), see the next page.

©2008 Toshiba Corporation

(*2) LEAD-FREE SOLDER

DO NOT USE LEAD BASED SOLDER TO REPAIR THIS PRODUCT !

CAUTION ..................................................................................................................................... A1-1

ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF

Dear Customer, FCC compliance information

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS (Continued)

Precautions Precautions (Continued)/Notes on discs

Each title, chapter or track is assigned a number, which

Notes on discs (Continued) Contents

VOLUME (+/–) buttons 26

CHANNEL 26 Antenna jack 14 15

Identification of controls (Continued)

Antenna connections Cable TV connections

Antenna For basic cable service not requiring a converter/descrambler

300-75 ohm matching

Antenna Connect the UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire to the

UHF 300 ohm VHF 300 ohm

UHF 300 ohm

Using the audio/video inputs

on which input jacks you used to connect your devices. 1.Video

: Signal ﬂow To COLORSTREAM HD

Connecting to optional equipment (Continued)

Connecting to an ampliﬁer equipped with an MPEG audio decoder

Connecting to optional equipment (Continued)/ Auto Setup POWER

The Auto Setup function helps to install your TV/DVD easily.

VGA 720x400 70Hz Analog Channel Found : 0

Air - VHF/UHF channels

Setting the language POWER

Setting the language Air/Cable selection Automatic search

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Automatic Search”,

The TV/DVD will begin memorizing all the

Air - VHF/UHF channels

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

To memorize channels (Continued)

Add/Delete channel Adding Channel Clear All

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Clear All”, then press

4 then press ϶ or ENTER. The new channel will

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

TV operation TV operation (continued)

display will appear briefly every ten minutes to remind

• If a channel is selected to which you have not When the TV/DVD

Labeling channels Labeling video inputs

Labeling channels Labeling video inputs

1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

: Select ENTER:Set : Select ENTER:Set

2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Ch Label”, then

If the character which you desire appears, press

5 When you finish inputting the label name,

press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

3 Press ϵ or ϶ to select a channel you want to

6 Repeat steps 3-5 for other channel. You can ColorStream HD -

Setting the V-Chip

To register a password To change a password To set the V-Chip

1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

5 Press ϳ or ϴ to select which rating will be

Lock Lock Lock TV Rating >>

: Select ENTER: Set

For (1) and (2), see the next page.